Home
        IQ-MSD Turbo Software User Manual
         Contents
1.                                   Ee      _  MSD Turbo    JSER MANUA    Advanced IQ Software for IQ System Control and  Monitoring with an MS DOS PC Host Computer                                                 Version 1 4       1996 by Crown International  Inc   P O  Box 1000  Elkhart  IN 46515 1000 U S A    Telephone  219 294 8000  Fax  219 294 8329  IQ System components and   software are produced by the Professional Audio Division of Crown International  Inc    Trademark Notice  MPX 6   SMX 6   AMB 5   Distributed Intelligence    and   SmartAmp    are trademarks and Dataframe   Amcron   Crown  IOC   ODEP   IQ Printed on  System   and P I P   are registered trademarks of Crown International  Inc  Other recycled paper   trademarks are the property of their respective owners     100234 1  12 96          Crown Software License Agreement    This is a legal agreement between you  the end user  and Crown  a division of Crown Interna   tional  Inc   1718 West Mishawaka Road  Elkhart  Indiana 46517 4095 U S A  If you do not agree to the  terms of this agreement  promptly return the unopened disk package and the accompanying  items  including written materials and binders or other containers  to the place you obtained  them for a refund     License    1  Crown grants to you the personal  non exclusive right to use one copy of the enclosed software program  the    Software     on a single computer at any one  time  A computer is hereby defined as one central processing unit and asso
2.         Fig  4 11 The Legend Automatically Scales to Fit the Bar Meter    To change the attributes of an object after it has been created  click on it with the right mouse button    3      Page 80    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    4 5 Digital Meter   The Digital Meter object is a numerical level display  For example  it can provide real time display of the signal  levels of amplifiers with IQ P  Ps and some IQ mixers  Each Digital Meter you create takes some processing time  from the host computer  This means that the more Digital Meters you create  the slower their response  To place  a Digital Meter on a graphics plate  choose Digital Meter from the Toolbox  The Digital Meter Attributes  window  Figure 4 12  will then open so you can configure it  Its attributes are described next     Bigital Heter Attributes  Looe i Sessie Multiplesyr i      Seegieg Multiples 2  feagieg Multiple F  Seeagieg Multiple 4  feedieg Multiple  amp   Teg    Looe fag Multiples 1    Fittest ga    leput  tutput  D3  D  Fax LeFel  Hie Lewes    Bookroued    E Peak Guy  Text ST  Ca J  Ee       Fig  4 12 The Digital Meter Attributes Window    Component List  Selects the IQ component to which the Digital Meter will be linked  All IQ components that  appear in the control blocks and all  Q2 components whose UCODE  OIF file  is visible to Turbo will appear in this  list     Function List  Selects the specific function that the Digital Meter will monitor  The function list will change 
3.         Homia      Low    Fig  3 3 The Combined Objects for the Graphics Plate Design Example    feature off and the labels off to keep the bar meter simple  We also added a separate text object as a label to show  the normal level that is needed in the waiting room  The pot object is assigned to control the input attenuator for  Channel 1  We gave it an operating range of 0 to    10 dB  With only a 10 dB operating range  it will be impossible  for the operator to turn the level too low  We also turned the labels off for the pot object and we added our own High   Low labels to show the operator which way to move the control  Finally  we added the text objects at the top to  clearly identify these controls as the    Waiting Room Background Music    controls     The operating instructions for this example are simple  Adjust the level control up and down so that the signal level  goes up to the    Normal    mark on the bar meter     Page 47    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    3 1 2 Graphics Plate Design Principles   The following principles will help you plan and design good graphics plates    Determine a clear purpose of each graphics plate    Consider the abilities and needs of the people who will operate the system    Determine which objects will be needed    Keep graphics plates simple  Avoid unnecessary complexity and clutter    Use container objects and text objects to make graphics plates attractive and easy to understand     OA ON       Use muted  
4.       Fig  8 5 The Drone Simplex Input Commands Sub block Screen    Each drone command sub block has four buttons  Add  Modify  Copy and Delete  Use f  p  to switch between  the command list on the left and the buttons on the right  To select a button  use f  por press pm  and the first letter  of the button  example  press j  s4   to select the Add button      Add  Use the Add button to assign a new command to an input  For example  select Add to assign the amplifier     Power Ch 1    command  function  to a switch connected to AUX Input 1  Selecting Add summons a window to  prompt you for the assignment information  This is shown in Figure 8 6     Only one command can be assigned to an input at a time with the command window but you can assign as many  commands as you want to an input by repeating the steps described next and assigning additional commands to  the same input     Page 175    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software       Fig  8 6 Adding a Command Assignment to a Simplex AUX Input    To make a command assignment  begin at the top with the input number  Each parameter is described next  Use  p   to select them     Input    The drone AUX input number     Use Analog As AUX  Tells the drone to use an analog input in place of an AUX input   Analog inputs can  be used as AUX inputs  making it possible to have as many as 32    AUX    inputs   If an analog input is used  it  will be numbered after the AUX inputs  In the example above  analog Input  1 would b
5.       i  jon a  SA TnEP HE i aa  Ai  Uk Gk H k Gk I0 Gk Tk Uk Gk Uk Gk          Bai  ad  if FUR f z FHR    oe     ade L A ada L A       Fig  2 4 A 6 Bar Amplifier Display Screen    Finally  some of the more advanced IQ components also have one or more Sub block screens  Sub block  screens contain a collection of controls that are used to configure automatic functions like signal compression or  limiting  auto standby  automatic mic mixing  etc  An amplifier Sub block screen is shown below in Figure 2 5  Only  amplifiers with IQ P  Ps having SmartAmp    features have a Sub block screen     DStPiP EAT ani       Fig  2 5 An Amplifier Sub block Screen    The biggest advantage of text screens is the ability to quickly set the parameters of many IQ components without  the need for custom designed controls     Page 19    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    2 1 2 Graphics Plates   A graphics plate is a graphic screen in which custom objects can be designed and stored to create attractive  operator screens for your  Q System  It may sound scary but it is actually very easy to create a graphics plate and  it gives you tremendous power over your system because you decide what controls are available and in many  cases what operating range the controls have  In addition  you can cause Turbo to display a graphics plate rather  than a text screen when the program starts up  making the program that much friendlier for your operators  A  sample graphics plate which was mad
6.    4 36 The Custom GDM Save Dialog Box           csesscsssssssssessessssessessssessessssessssassessessssssassesssessseceseesseceseesseceesecsessees  AST    2AGDM Container iia Poets elec iaaa E EA cel hie AR a an E a  4 38 The Mini Plate Attributes Window    i  4 39 AMini Plate Container Object   0 0    cee cesesseesssesseesesessesscsessesscsesseescsessecsssesseessseeseessseeueansneeusananesnsansneeneenaneens    Page 8    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    4 40  4 41  4 42  4 43  4 44  4 45  4 46  447  4 48  4 49  4 50  4 51  4 52  4 53  4 54  4 55  4 56  4 57  4 58  4 59  4 60  5 1    5 3  5 4  5 5  5 6  5 7    5 9   5 10  5 11  5 12  5 13    6 2  6 3  6 4  6 5  6 6    6 8   6 9   6 10  6 11  6 12  6 13  6 14  6 15  6 16  6 17                            The Select Mini Plate Window   0        ccesessessessesseestescestessestecseesceseesusaeesueeseseeesteaseateseatesueeassueeaeesseatesueatenneeas 102  The Line Attributes Window          103  Two Sample Line Objects                     103  The Drone Object Attributes Window            eeee     104  The Aux Input Drone Container Attributes Window            104  The Analog Input Drone Container Attributes Window           105  The Binary Input Drone Container Attributes Window          105  The Aux Output Drone Container Attributes Window         106  The Paralyze Drone Button Attributes Window               cce     106  A Drone Container  Left  and Drone Paralyze Button  Right           107  The Plotter Att
7.    A graphics plate is a graphic screen in which custom objects can be designed and stored to create attractive  operator screens for your IQ System  A wide variety of objects are available from the graphics plate Toolbox  For  example  the Toolbox has bar meter and LED objects that mimic the real thing  It also has    pots    that mimic level  controls and buttons that mimic a pushbutton  You use these prebuilt objects to construct control panels for your  system on one or more graphics plates  Figure 2 22 shows some of these objects and the Toolbox menu     You have complete control to decide which controls your operators can access and  in many cases  what the  operating range of the controls will be  For example  you can create a    pot    for the input attenuator of Channel 1  of an IQ P  P equipped Crown amplifier and decide where it will be located on the screen  what its size and color  will be and what its maximum and minimum settings will be  Next you can create a bar meter to monitor its input  level  You decide whether or not the bar meter will have a    peak hold    feature and include a text legend     Graphic Bisplay    a  a  Ki    a  ri      ki   Ta  et  a  i    Buttom  Syortern     Fiotter Object  Cure  fort       Fig  2 22 A Graphics Plate Under Construction    Page 38    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    2 8 1 The Graphics Plate Control Block Screen  Graphics Plates are treated like IQ components because each one has a control block  Use
8.   Each set is shown with and  without a legend  The two vertical Pots have a border and the two horizontal Pots do not     Page 74    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown       Fig  4 4 Sample Pot Objects    Notice in Figure 4 5 that the legend is dynamic and automatically scales itself to the size of the Pot        Fig  4 5 The Legend Automatically Scales to Fit the Pot    Notice in Figure 4 6 that the pointer changes to a hand when itis clicked on the Pot  showing that any movement  up or down will now change its level     EES       Fig  4 6 The Pointer Changes to a Hand When the Pot Handle is Clicked or Dragged    Important  Level changes made with a Pot are immediately sent to the associated IQ component     Several Pots can be assigned to the same function  For example  you can create three Pots to control the input  attenuation of Channel 1 of the same amplifier  If you do this  you will find that changes to the level of one Pot are  immediately reflected by the others     To change the attributes of an object after it has been created  click on it with the right mouse button    3      Page 75    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    4 3 On Off Button   A On Off Button object acts like a pushbutton to turn something on or off  It is square or rectangular in shape  To  place an On Off Button on a graphics plate  choose Button  On Off  from the Toolbox  The Button Attributes  window  Figure 4 7  will then open so you can configure it  Its a
9.   Or you can ignore this control if the computer is not connected to an  active 1Q System     3 Make sure that the Graphics Security Lock control is turned off or else we will not be able to add any  objects or make changes to the graphics plate  You will probably want to turn on this control after the  graphics plate has been designed to prevent your operators from accidentally changing it    4 Switch the Display control to the Memory setting so that standard GDMs will not be automatically created  when we go to the graphics plate   See Section 4 1 if you want to use the standard GDMs      Page 49    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    5 Press jt   fto open the Graphics Setup window and set the resolution and color depth of the graphics  plate  Each graphics plate can be set differently  The Graphics Setup window is shown in Figure 3 5  below        Fig  3 5 The Graphics Setup Window    The default setting is 640x480x16  the minimum VGA standard and the setting with best performance    This means the graphics plate will have a resolution of 640x480 pixels and will display up to 16 colors   More objects can be placed on the graphics plate at higher resolutions  However the objects will appear  smaller because the physical size of your computer monitor does not change  Two color depths are  available  16 color and 256 color  Important  Do not set the resolution or color depth higher than the  host computer is capable of using  If you don   t know how high y
10.   Page 177    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Lock  Auto Level Threshold    locks output Channel 1 and 2 so that changes to the Auto Level threshold of one  also affect the other  AMB 5 Mixer  includes all MPX 6 commands plus    ASA   turn on off all automation functions  Max Gain Tracks Control Block   makes Max Gain of each input equal to the control block gain settings  Control Block Override   this control is reserved for future use  Max Gain   set the maximum gain for an input of Channel 1  Low Set   set the    closed gate    gain for an input of Channel 1  Gate Algo   turn on off the Gate function  Gate Threshold   set the point when an input gate    opens     Duck Priority   turn on offthe Duck Priority function  Input Compression   tur on off the Input Compressor Limiter function  Input Compression Threshold   set the point when input compression begins  Auto Level   tum on off the Auto Level function  Auto Level DAOL   set the Desired Average Output Level of each input of Channel 1  Idle Gain   set the initial level for the Auto Level function when a gate    opens     Output Compression   turn on off the Output Compressor Limiter function  Output Compression Threshold   set the point when compression begins  Output Limiter   select which inputs of Channel 1 are compressed  Gate Count Master   tum on off the Gate Count function  Gate Count   tum on off gate counting for each input  Ambience   tum on off the AMB function  Ambience Threshold   se
11.   When tumed on  it forces the test start frequency  duration and stop frequency to be the equivalent of an eight   channel test regardless of the number of channels actually being used  When turned off  the duration of a test  is determined by the number of channels being used in the one unit  Note  The previous sweep parameters  must be set the same for all units when Sync is turned on     Test  The following parameters configure other aspects of a test     Impedance Tolerance  Sets the criteria by which impedance test data is evaluated to determine if the  load should pass or fail a test  It simply compares the impedance test data to the reference impedance data to  see how much they differ  If the difference is greater than the Impedance Tolerance setting  the load has failed  the test  The range is  1 to  100      Frequency Tolerance  Sets the criteria by which frequency test data is evaluated to determine if the  output should pass or fail a test  It simply compares the frequency magnitude test data to the reference frequency  magnitude data to see how much they differ  If the difference is greater than the Frequency Tolerance setting   the output has failed the test  The range is  1 to  25 dB     Page 199    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    AUX In Trigger  Turn on this control for stand alone operation  When turned on  positive voltage  logic  high  across the AUX port input will trigger a test  This enables the SLM 8 to function without an  Q Sy
12.   screen  The keyboard shortcut is either p1   p  or f9      Page 29    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    2 5 Using Control Blocks   Most IQ components have a control block  As its name suggests  a control block serves as a ready made place  to control an IQ component  All control blocks can be accessed from a Control Block screen  This is one of the types  of text screens we referred to earlier in Section 2 1 1  Specific Control Block screens are selected with the  Device menu   Device is synonymous with IQ component   To use the Device menu  press       from any  Control Block screen  Figure 2 14 shows a typical Device menu        Device  Menu       Fig  2 14 The Device Menu    The Device menu is quite flexible and offers several methods for making a selection   1 Keyboard  Use the    g keys to highlight the desired device and press peter   2 Keyboard  Press the highlighted character  Example  press p  for the SMX 6 mixer   3 Mouse  Click      on the desired device     A sample SMX Control Block screen is shown below in Figure 2 15  Notice that four individual SMX 6 control  blocks are visible on the SMX Control Block screen        Command Fi   amp  Title Bar H  n One SMX 6  p Control Block     4  P  E     4  iF  E     4  iF  E  Status  Lines    Fig  2 15 An SMX Control Block Screen    Page 30    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    A Command  amp  Title Bar is located at the top of the Control Block screen  It lists the function keys 
13.   the Channel 1 gain will be increased above the Ambient  Offset according to the Expansion Ratio setting  The Max Gain settings always limit the maximum possible gain  which any input can receive     Inputs whose net gain is forced below the Ambient Offset by the other functions are ignored by the AMB function   This prevents the AMB function from attempting to increase the gain of inputs whose gates have been closed     The following list shows the possible settings for each AMB function control  Note  All dB settings are dBu     Ambience  On Off   Attack Time  0 2  0 4  0 6  0 8  1  1 5  2  3  4  6  8  10  12  15  20  30 seconds  Decay Time  0 2  0 4  0 6  0 8  1  1 5  2  3  4  6  8  10  12  15  20  30 seconds  Expansion Ratio  1 1  1 5 1  2 1  2 5 1  3 1  4 1  5 1   Guard Band  0  1  2  3  4  5 dB   Threshold  Off   99  dB to  25 dB in   dB steps   Ambient Offset  0 to 40 dB in   dB steps    Page 161    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Page 162    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    7 Monitoring  amp  Controlling Equalizers    An    equalizer    is a device that is used to adjust the sound level over relatively narrow frequency bands  For  example  a 4 octave equalizer divides the audio band  usually 20 Hz to 20 kHz  into   octave bands and  provides a level control for each band  Equalizers get their name from their most common use   making the level  of all frequencies equal  Several third parties have developed digital equalizers 
14.   this attribute determines the maximum Y value to be plotted   Bottom Y Axis  If the Auto Y Axis attribute is turned off  this attribute determines the minimum Y value to be plotted     The Plotter object looks like a large button as shown in Figure 4 52 below     Fig  4 52 A Sample Plotter Object    Figure 4 53 shows a plotter object with a single curve  The curve was added by dragging a Curve object on top  of the Plotter object     SG GG BD i a da iiia  Fey  Cw Fiii Fiori       Fig  4 53 A Plotter Object with a Curve Object    Page 109    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Holding and dragging the pointer over the Plotter object with the left mouse button      will cause a cursor to  display the exact value of each coordinate on the graph  This is shown in Figure 4 54 below        Fig  4 54 The Plotter Cursor Displays the Value of Each Graph Coordinate    Note  A Plotter object will be automatically created whenever a Curve object is created if no other Plotter objects  are present     To remove a curve from the graph  drag its label off of the bottom of the Plotter object  This unlinks the Curve object  from the Plotter object     Page 110    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    4 17 Curve   The Curve object represents one curve on a Plotter object  see Section 4 16   By themselves  Curve objects  have no visible attributes or function  When linked to a Plotter object  they are displayed as a curve  To create a  Curve object  choose Cu
15.   tj    to decrement the  level  Note  Fractions cannot be entered directly  Use the increment decrement method for fractions     Mouse  First select the desired level control  Then  press and hold gs t  while moving the mouse  f  upward to  increment and downward to decrement  Do not click or drag while moving the mouse     e Setting a Range Control   Keyboard  A   range    control let s you select from a list of preset choices  For example  the dual mono control in an  amplifier control block allows the following settings to be selected  DUAL  BRID and PARA  These controls function  very similarly to an on off control  To set them  first select the control then press the    Space Bar    to advance the  selection from one value to the next  The selection will advance to the first choice after passing the last one     e Moving from a Control Block to a Sub block  Keyboard  Select the ASA control and press p  or eter      Mouse  With the ASA control selected  move the mouse  f  in a downward direction without clicking or dragging     Page 33    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    2 6 Using Sub blocks   Some  but not all  IQ components have one or more sub blocks  As their name suggests  sub blocks are  organized    under    control blocks  They allow the user to delve deeper into the controls of a IQ component  Sub   blocks contain the controls that configure the automation features of the more advanced IQ components  A single  sub block contains the contro
16.  12 Adding a Paralyze Command Assignment to an Analog Input                8 13  The Drone Control Block with the Transponder Switch Enabled           188    9 1 The Matrixer Control Block Screen    9 2 Monitoring  amp  Controlling a Matrixer from a Graphics Plate           10 1 The PSI Control Block Sereen       c ccccccscccsceescstesesesesteseees    193    10 2 Monitoring  amp  Controlling a PSI from a Graphics Plate      11 1 An SLM 8 Control Block Screen        11 2 The SLM 8 Setup Sub block Screen            11 3 A Sample Impedance Curve          ccccecsssscsssescstesteseseesnees     197  11 4 A Sample Graphics Plate Plotter Object with Two Curves      197  11 5 The SLM 8 Setup Sub block Screen    cesesseccssesseecssessescesessescsesseesesessessesecseeseuecueecausaneeseueausassusaneeseneaneeses 198  11 6 Exporting  Data to a DIF FiS Sirenia aia aia ii laaie aS 202    Page 10    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown       1 Introducing  Q   MSD Turbo    Welcome to the Crown  Q MSD Turbo program   software that brings the powerful monitor and control capabili   ties of your IQ audio system to your PC compatible computer  This manual will describe the use of version 1 4 of  IQ MSD Turbo  referred from here on simply as Turbo     With Turbo you can monitor and control your audio system from a remote location  It works with Crown   s  acclaimed IQ components  sophisticated audio components that are designed to work with Crown s patented  Q  System    But Turbo do
17.  156    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    6 4 9 Mute Function  SMX 6 Mixers Only     Figures 6 13  6 16 and 6 17  The Mute function is a specialized function for third part developers who need to  mute an SMX 6 input from an external control system  However  this feature comes with a price   enabling it forces  you to give up Gate Count function for Channel 2     Allow Mute  The Mute function is turned on and off with this control  When it is turned on  a reminder  Figure  6 16  will be displayed to warn you that the Gate Count function will be disabled for Channel 2        Fig  6 16 Turning On the Mute Function Will  Disable the Gate Count Function for Channel 2    Anew row of Mute on off controls will appear at the bottom of the sub block  Figure 6 17  when the Mute function  is turned on  Notice also that the Count Level control for Channel 2 is disabled to show that this function is no longer  available for Channel 2 as long as the Mute feature is turned on        Fig  6 17 The Mute Feature of an SMX 6    Page 157    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software      crown    Mute  Each input is individually muted with these controls  The muting is post processed after all other functions   This is important because of the following possible scenario  With the Gate and Duck Priority functions both turned  on  it is possible for a higher priority input to open while it is muted  Of course  this will result in no sound     The following list shows the pos
18.  182  AUXinputsetup 174  binary mode 180 181  simplex mode 175 179  AUX output setup 184  linking multiple drones 188  paralyze setup 186 187  drone list 104  drone object 104 107  drones 169 188  DSP 121  129 131  DSPI 121  138  165  166  190  194  201  206  dual mono 122  duck 155  206  duck priority 145  206    E   edit 99   emergency mute 27  37 206  engage 42 206   equalizer 178  183  206  equalizers 163 167   error reporting 127   exit 31  206   expansion ratio 160  206  export 202   extalgos 155  206  external functions 154 155    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    F  fast roll call 26  fault 127  feed forward compressor 207  file name 207  filter 129 131  high pass 130  high pass equalization 130  high pass shelving equalization 130  low pass 130  low pass equalization 130  low pass shelving equalization 130  parametric equalization 130  flat 166  flush  graphics plate  41  flushing 36  font 85 87  93  207  bold 87  color 86  italics 87  shadow 87  size 86  fontlist 85  freq  frequency  130  freq ref 200  freq wiref 201  frequency 200  frequency tolerance 199  function  AMB function 159 161  auto level 148 150  duck priority 145  error reporting 127  external functions 154 155  gate count 153  gate function 143 144  input compressor 128  input compressor imiter 146 147  mute 157 158  ODEP conservation 126  output compressorilimiter 151 152         crown    programmable filter 129 131  signal delay 129  smooth outputlimiter 126 127  SMX interrupts 156  sta
19.  2 13 System AUX Setup Screen    Up to 16 different AUX ports can be monitored at the same time and each one can load or save the settings from   to a different dataframe file  Notice that three parameters are used to define a single System AUX function  Monitor   Action and Dataframe  Use 1   71           1  to select the function you want to enter or edit  p   does not work in this  screen      The monitor parameter identifies which AUX port is to be monitored  Use the following procedure to describe  it  1 Begin with    L    followed by the loop number of the IQ component     2 Use one of the following three letter mnemonics for the component type   AMP Amplifier with IQ PI P AP  version 1 45 or later     PX MPX 6 mixer  x  SMX 6 mixer  B  AMB 5 mixer    RX  MRX 24 or MRX 12 matrixer  RN  DRN 16 drone   SI Pocket Serial Interface   LM SLM 8 system and load monitor       OS oe or    Page 28    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    3 Specify the IQ address of the component after the component type   4 For a drone  specify a drone input with    IN    followed by the input number  1 16      Notes  Case does not matter  Commas and spaces are ignored and can be added to improve readability     Here are some examples   L1 SMX5  L3  AMP 1  L1  DRN 24  IN 5 2       The action parameter identifies what action will be taken with the specified dataframe file  The choices are  Nore  Load and Save   The action is taken when the AUX input changes from a logic low to a log
20.  Buttons can be used to create hidden hot spots  However  care should be taken using  this attribute so that hidden buttons are not    lost    on the graphics plate  If this happens  press pm   f  to make all  hidden buttons visible  Pressing pm   f  a second time will toggle the hidden buttons back to their hidden state     A sample System Button is shown below in Figure 4 34     B     Fig  4 34 A System Button    Note  To change the attributes of an object after it has been created  click on it with the right mouse button         Page 96    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    4 12 GDM Container   A GDM Container is a specialized container object that is used to create a custom GDM   See Section 3 9 for a  description of custom GDMs   To place a GDM Container on a graphics plate  choose GDM Container from the  Toolbox  The GDM Container Attributes window  Figure 4 35  will then open so you can configure it  Its attributes  are described below     GRA Coets imsy Attributes    E  Forder E  Soale E  Gomeeet      ox  Ce n n        Fig  4 35 The GDM Container Attributes Window    Component List  Selects the type of IQ component to which the GDM Container will be linked  Only those  1Q2 components with an OIF  Object Information File  in the same directory as Turbo will be included  See Section  3 9 1 for information about OIFs     Loop  Sets the Crown Bus loop number of the IQ component that is linked to the custom GDM  This attribute  should be ignored when cre
21.  Compressor Limiter function which is designed to handle sudden or transient jumps  in input level  the Auto Level function is designed to control long term changes in signal level  Using it  the average  output level can be kept relatively constant over a longer time interval while transients are allowed to pass  This  feature creates a more natural sound with increased dynamic range     Page 147    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software       Fig  6 12 The Third SMX 6 Sub block Screen    Auto Level  The Auto Level function is turned on and off with this control     DAOL  The DAOL control sets the Desired Average Output Level for the Auto Level function  If the DAOL is set  to  20 dB  and the output signal level is  20 dB  nothing changes  The signal passes at the same level  But if the  signal is above  20 dB  the Auto Level function will reduce the gain to bring the level down to  20 dB  And if the  signal is below  20 dB  the gain is increased to increase the level up to  20 dB     IMPORTANT  The Max Gain control is not intended to be adjusted in    real time    while the ASA control is turned  on  Instead  use the DAOL control of the Auto Level function  The new level will not take affect until the Reaction  Time setting of the Auto Level function has transpired     Reaction Time  The Auto Level function continually adjusts the signal level toward the DAOL value  But it  doesn t adjust the signal in one jump  Instead  the Reaction Time control sets the size o
22.  Control Block   The drone control block provides the highest level of supervision over a drone  From it you can turn on off the  drone   s internal programming  individually control each logic output and monitor both logic and analog inputs  The  control block is also the gateway into the drone sub blocks that allow you to    train    or program a drone  Use the  Device menu  ff  to access a drone Control Block screen  A drone Control Block screen is shown in Figure 8 1     Output  Because the drone is designed primarily for automation  it seldom needs to be manually controlled from  its control block  Once switches and pots have been connected to the drone   s inputs and it has been taught what  to do with them  it can run itselfand most of the  Q System  However  there may be times when a logic output must  be manually turned on and off from the drone control block     To turn a logic output on or off  select the output in the    Output    line under the    AUX System Digital Data    section  of the control block  The selected output will change to a light blue color  Press the    Space Bar    to toggle the output  on and off  When it is on the indicator block will be full height  When itis off it will be half height  Note  The ASA control  must be turned off in order to manually change a logic output setting     Tip  The AUX output settings can be saved as part of a dataframe file by pressing ff if the ASA control is off     Tip  To toggle ASA on and off from anywhere on 
23.  FAFA EnEn   that are available from the Control Block screen and  in the center  the IQ components represented in the control  blocks  SMX   At the bottom of the control block screen are two status lines which display the Offset number and  the current dataframe file name     The offset number is the number of the currently selected control block and it helps you keep track of your   location in systems with many IQ components  The control blocks are numbered from top to bottom  beginning with   1  one  at the top  Suppose  for example that your  Q System has ten SMX 6 mixers  Each one will be given its   own control block so your system will have 1 10 control blocks  Since only four of them can be viewed at the same 2  time in the Control Block screen  Turbo will allow you to scroll through them with per  pe   When you do this  the   offset number tells you which control block has the current focus of the system  If you scroll down to the seventh   control block  the offset number will be seven  In the example in Figure 2 15  the offset number is one because the   first control block has the focus        If a dataframe file has been engaged or saved  its name will be listed at the very bottom of the screen  In Figure  2 15  dataframe file SETUP 1 is listed     Occasionally you may also see other items listed on one of the status lines  For example  some screens will list    Esc    Exit    in the far right corner to let you know that you can exit the screen by pressing the g
24.  FIT   NESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE  Some states or provinces do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties or limitations on how long an implied  warranty may last  so the above limitations may not apply to you  This warranty gives you specific legal rights  You may have other rights which vary from  state to state or province to province  For further warranty information you may contact Crown   s Technical Services Department at 57620 County Road 105   Elkhart  Indiana 46517     4  INNO EVENT WILL CROWN BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL  INCIDENTAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING ANY LOST PROF   ITS OR LOST SAVINGS  EVEN IF A CROWN REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES  OR FOR ANY CLAIM  BY ANY PARTY  Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental  consequential or special damages  so the above limitation or exclusion  may not apply to you     5  This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Indiana     U S  Government Restricted Rights    The Software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS  Use  duplication  or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set  forth in subparagraph  c  1  ii  of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at 52 227 7013     Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement  please contact Crown   s Technical Services Department at 57620 County Road 105  Elkhart  Indi   ana 46517   12 91             IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Adv
25.  Hold In To Operate mode causes the Button to  send the On command when it is pressed and the Off command when it is released     On  Sets the color when the Button is turned on   Off  Sets the color when the Button is turned off     Delay  ms   Causes a delay in milliseconds between the time the Button is pressed until the its command is sent  and the Button color is updated  Enter a value of 0  zero  to turn off the delay  The delay timer is reset every time  the Button is pressed  The Delay attribute has no affect when the Action is set to Hold In To Operate     Note  Buttons configured to contro  amplifier global all commands will control amplifiers on all Crown Bus loops   However  the same functions  when controlled from a drone  are specific to just one Crown Bus loop     On Level  Sets the turn on level when the Button is used to control a level function   Off Level  Sets the turn off level when the Button is used to control a level function     Inverted  Swaps the on off commands so that the Button sends the Off command when it is turned on and the  On command when it is turned off     Relative   Drone AUX inputs only   Causes changes made to a level function to be made relative to its present  level  When this attribute is turned off  the on off levels are absolute  This attribute is only available when the Button  is used to configure an AUX input on a drone     Hidden  Causes the button not to be displayed on the graphics plate  However  the button is fully functi
26.  Homa     Hii    Fig  5 10 Manual Amplifier Control with Custom Controls on a Graphics Plate    Another advantage of designing a control on a graphics plate is that you can control the size and color  For  example  you can easily design a large Power on off button that is bright green when the power is on and dull red  when the power is off     You can also choose to omit controls that you don   t want a user to have  For example  you don   t want the user to  toggle the polarity of a channel  don   t give them a control for it on the graphics plate  In a control block  users always  have access to every manual control  In a graphics plate  you can limit that access     Page 124    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    5 4 Automated Controls   Some IQ PI Ps such as the IQ PI P SMT and IQ PI P DSP include features that  once configured  automati   cally run without further supervision from the  Q System  These features  as a group  are referred to as  SmartAmp features  They can be configured from a Sub block screen or from a graphics plate  However  this  section will focus on configuring them from a sub block because it is a bit easier  To configure the SmartAmp  features from a graphics plate you can use a standard amplifier GDM or create a control  assign a SmartAmp  parameter to it and then set the parameter     To switch to the Sub block screen  select ASA in the control block of the desired amplifier and press eter   Or g    Remember  too  that the ASA c
27.  IQ  mixers  Refer to Section 3 9 for more information about creating a custom GDM     Page 137    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    6 3 Manual Controls  All IQ mixers can be manually controlled  This can be done from both a control block and from custom controls you  create on a graphics plate     6 3 1 Manual Control from a Control Block  Use the Device menu    1  to access an IQ mixer Control Block screen  A sample SMX 6 Control Block screen  is shown below in Figure 6 6     Fi  4  Haa  L  Pat  4  H  L  P  4  Haa  L  F  4  H  L  P       Fig  6 6 An SMX 6 Control Block Screen  All of the manual controls will be describe next  However  not all controls are available for all IQ mixers  Refer to  the control blocks in Figure 6 1 to see which controls are available for the different models     DSPI  The Data Signal Presence Indicator is an LED on the front panel of the IQ mixer that flashes whenever  the mixer is polled  The DSPI control is used to force the indicator to stay on as an aid to the troubleshooting of  communication on the Crown Bus  Once the DSPI control is turned on  the DPSI will remain lit continuously even  if the control block for another device is selected  Turning off the DSPI control restores the indicator to its normal  function of blinking when a valid IQ command is received     Aux  Toggles the mixer   s AUX port output on and off     Sel  Selects the mixer so that a GDM for it is added to a graphics plate when the graphics plate i
28.  IQ System Software             3 Designing Graphics Plates            cccccssssseseeeceeeeeeeesessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeaeeeennnes 45  Sil   COVCIVIEW 33320 sche sien a eines ieee ee a ae ee ed 45  Sal  A Simple Example ei  8  fi ienced a E a 45  3 1 2 Graphics Plate Design Principles           cccccssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssasssesrssesnsasersasensaeeees 48  3 2 Creating a New Graphics Plate        c cccscsssssesssssssesssssessssssessssessssessssesesees we AY  3 3 Adding Objects to a Graphics Plate        c  cccscsssssssesessssssssessessssessesssessesseees a03  Sadik    T00  010  SRAT ET E ATT igo  3 3 2     Resizing an  Objeten sasosnenimininininian niaan a 55  3 3 3 Moving One or More Objects          cceecsssessessssssesssnssssssssssssseeeeeees we 06  3 3 4        AutosiZing    an Object irene m 58  3 3 5 Changing the Attributes of an Object us cscesesessesseesesesssssessesteseeeees we DD  3 3 6 Copying and Pasting an Object        cccsecssesesssessseessssssssssssesnsseesens w 60  3 4 Deleting an Object from a Graphics Plate         csccccssssesssesssssssssssssssessesseeees   64  3 5 Adding a New IQ Component from a Graphics Plate un 64  3 6 Copying and Pasting an Entire Graphics Plate           ccccsssessssssesesssesseeeeen wn 62  3 7 Restoring a Graphics Plate to a    New    Condition 0    cccsessesssssssssssssssssessssesssssnssssrsaseneaeasees 62  3 8 The Crown 1Q leon vs    cc4 cesar eanieanaieeane cua cadadaenianwanawnnadedia  3 9 How to Create a Custom GDM 
29.  IQ System Software    4 15 Drone Objects   An IQ drone is an IQ component that can  among other things  enable an  Q System to function automatically  without an operator or host computer  This section will focus on just a description of the drone objects since Section  8 later in this manual provides a full description of a DRN 16 drone     There are two types of drone objects  Drone Container objects and Drone Paralyze Button objects  To place a  drone object on a graphics plate  choose Drone Objects from the Toolbox  The Drone Object Attributes  window  Figure 4 43  will then open so you can configure it  Its attributes are described below        Fig  4 43 The Drone Object Attributes Window  Drone List  Selects the drone to which the drone object will be linked   Object Type  Selects the type of drone object to be created     Aux Input Container  Selects a Drone Container which is linked to a single AUX input of the drone  On Off  Buttons and Drone Paralyze Buttons placed in the container will be automatically linked to the specified AUX  input of the drone  To configure the Aux Input Drone Container press the Setup button  The Attributes windows  shown in Figure 4 44 will open     fa Depot Comte iess Attributes    sput  FT  O Me alog fe fu  Baokgrouss      Fig  4 44 The Aux Input Drone Container Attributes Window       Page 104    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Input  Selects a drone AUX  logic  input    Use Analog As Aux  Causes a drone analog inp
30.  PI Ps like the IQ PI P   MEM  IQ PI P SMT and IQ PI P DSP     e New DSP Sub block screen for IQ PI P s with digital signal processing capability   e Anew input compressor function has been added to all  Q2 P  P s with SmartAmp automation features       Improvements to the user interface add consistency  For example  you can use the minus key to enter a  negative number into a level control     e New graphics plate objects like the Plotter  Curve and String objects   e Enhanced error reporting     Support for the PSI  Pocket Serial Interface   a new and portable IQ interface       Support for    System AUX     the ability for an IQ AUX port on any IQ component to trigger changes in the  Q  System by loading the system settings in a predetermined dataframe file     e The ability to automically detect the baud rate of the IQ interface     Page 15    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Page 16    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    2 Using Turbo    The most effective way to learn Turbo is to begin using it to monitor and control an active sound system  This way 2  you can immediately observe the effects of your commands on the system  When doing this  always use caution  to avoid increasing the gain too far because hearing and loudspeaker damage can result        Turbo can also be run when the computer is not connected to an  Q System  This allows you to create custom  graphics plates and configure system settings prior to the system   s insta
31.  Q2 PI P Control Block screen     The global controls include  DSPI  Mute  Power  Link and Sel  The Now and Defer controls determine whether  changes are made instantaneously or whether they are deferred until the Send button is activated  The settings  of the DSPI  Mute and Power controls are restored to their previous values when the window is closed  However   the Link and Sel controls settings are remembered after the window is closed     Note  The 1Q2 PI Ps also include a Save As Default button that allows you to save the all global control settings  as a default for future use     Page 123    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    5 3 3 Manual Control from a Graphics Plate   Earlier we saw that amplifier GDMs  like the ones shown in Figure 5 7  provide basic monitoring features and  manual controls  Graphics plates provide for tremendous flexibility to design custom screens with custom controls   One aspect to custom controls that is very appealing is the capability to limit the range of a control on a graphics  plate  Instead of providing a user with a level control having a fixed range from 0 to  50 dB  you could provide  them with a level control having a range of    10 to  30 dB to prevent them from turning a level too high or too low   Depending on how you design the level control  it can still appear to have a full range of movement  See Section  3 1 1 for a description of the sample shown below in Figure 5 10     wahing Room  Background Music    
32.  System Software crown    4 2 Pot   The Pot  Potentiometer  object is a level control that can be used to control settings such as gain  attenuation   compressor threshold and other similar variables  It looks like a slider or fader control and it is a very useful object   To place a Pot ona graphics plate  choose Pot from the Toolbox  The Pot Attributes window  Figure 4 3  will then  open so you can configure it  Its attributes are described below     Fot Attributes    eg Multiplier 2  eg Multiplier 3  ey Multiplier 4     C Horizontal    Hie camo Pape   EJ Border  Bockoroued  A  2  Curanr To Hamed be  Text Se  J Himtes To Cursor    CD int ruzi    Oro       Fig  4 3 The Pot Attributes Window    Component List  Selects the IQ component to which the Pot will be linked  All IQ components that appear in  the control blocks and all  Q2 components whose UCODE  OIF file  is visible to Turbo will appear in this list     Function List  Selects the specific function that the Potwill control  The function list will change to match the IQ  component selected in the component list     Channel  Selects the channel which the Pot will affect  This attribute will not be available for some IQ compo   nents and some functions     Input  Selects the input which the Pot will affect  This attribute will not be available for some IQ components and  some functions     Max  dB   Sets the maximum level for the Pot  In this way  you can limit the operating range of the control to  prevent an operator f
33.  Toolbox  The Container Attributes window  Figure 4 22  will then open  so you can configure it  Its attributes are described below     Crete ieee Mi feot Attributes    Beckgroumd      Fox FHteeane   ooo    E  Border E  Seale  E  Comenet       Fig  4 22 The Container Attribute Window    Background  Sets the background color of the Container  The border highlights and shadows are not  affected by the background color     PCX File name  Sets the file name of an image that will be displayed in the background of the Container  object  The ability to display an image in the background of the Container object is a very useful feature  It can  display your company logo  It can have a picture of a control panel that you complete by adding other objects     Only PCX bitmap files are supported and you will have to use a third party paint or graphics program to create  the PCX file  If you use this feature  we recommend that the image have a color depth no higher than the one you  are using for the graphics plate  see Section 3 2   For example  if your graphics plate is set to use 256 colors  we  recommend that the internal palette of the PCX image also have no more than 256 colors  It sometimes works best  if the image has an internal palette with fewer colors  For example  use a 16 color PCX with a 256 color graphics  plate  This sometimes gives Turbo a better chance of matching the colors correctly in your image     If you decide to use a PCX image  you must keep a copy of the PCX fi
34.  an ambient  sensing input  2  All of the AMB 5 Channel 2 input levels are manually controlled like an MPX 6 mixer and  therefore do not respond to any automatic functions     Page 135    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software         crown    Figure 6 4 shows an MPX 6 Display screen  Because the MPX 6 mixer has no sensing capability  it does not  have any signal level bar graphs  However  it does display the manual input level settings both as bar graphs  and  below them  as numeric values  They can be selected and the levels controlled from the Display screen as    described earlier     Fie lripl HFE       Wa    Fig  6 4 The MPX 6 Display Screen    When you are ready to leave a mixer Display screen  press   s     1  or right mouse click   4      Page 136    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    6 2 2 Monitoring from a Graphics Plate   The most graphical way to monitor an IQ mixer  and the way that offers the most control  is from a graphics plate   And you can simultaneously monitor more than one mixer   the maximum number is limited only by the design of  the graphics plate and speed of the system     A generic mixer GDM  Graphic Display Modules  is shown in Figure 6 5 below        Fig  6 5 Monitoring a Sensing IQ Mixer with a Graphics Plate GDM    The generic mixer GDM contains many of the same features as a mixer Display screen except that it has no  controls  However  the generic GDM does not have to be used  You can create and save custom GDMs for
35.  be used to  separate parts of a container or to highlight or draw attention to an important object or text label  To place a Line  on a graphics plate  choose Line Object from the Toolbox  The Line Attributes window  Figure 4 41  will then  open so you can configure it  Its attributes are described below     Lise Attributes    Birecti       horizta     Vertical    Fackgrousd  7       Fig  4 41 The Line Attributes Window    Direction  Determines whether the object will be a horizontal Line or a vertical Line object   Background  Sets the background color of the Line object     All Lines are two pixels thick  One row of pixels is always dark grey  color 8  to match the shadow edge of the  border of most objects  On horizontal Lines  the dark grey row is always on the bottom  On vertical Lines  the dark  grey row is always on the right  The color of the second row of pixels is set by the Background attribute     Two horizontal Line objects are shown in Figure 4 42  The Line on the top was placed directly on the graphics  plate  It has a background color of grey  color 7   The second Line was place inside a container and was given  a background color of white  color 15   This gives it a raised or three dimensional appearance like the border of  the container     Fig  4 42 Two Sample Line Objects    To make a Line object appear to be only one pixel thick  set the Background attribute to the same color as the color  behind the Line     Page 103    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced
36.  control block is used to select the channel to be monitored  The audio from the selected channel is then made  available at the fused monitor output on the back of the SLM 8  See the SLM 8 Reference Manual for wiring    instructions     11 3 Configuring an SLM 8  An SLM 8 is configured from its setup sub block  From the control block  press   4  or select the Setup command  and press the    Space Bar    or Left clicking the mouose          The Setup Sub block screen shown in Figure 11 5    will appear     IELA Bai LOOF j       Fig  11 5 The SLM 8 Setup Sub block Screen    Each control and parameter is explained next     Generator  The test signal generator of the SLM 8  required for impedance and frequency testing  is configured with the    following controls   Sweep Enable  Enables or disables the generator   Amplitude  Sets the output level of the generator  Its range is    40 dBu to  10 dBu in   dB steps     Osc Enable  Immediately turns on or off the signal generator when a test is not being performed  When  turned on with this control  the generator will output a fixed sine wave at the frequency specified by the Osc  Frequency parameter     Page 198    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Osc Frequency  Sets the frequency in hertz for the above function  It does not affect the generator when  a test is in progress     Sweep  The sweep parameters define the operation of the generator during a normal test sweep  Note  If all SLM 8s have  the same generato
37.  controls  Finally  a second container and label were included at the bottom to  label the control panel     If desired  you can create a custom GDM for a matrixer  It would be available to your graphics plates any time you  needed it  See Section 3 9 for additional information     Page 191    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Page 192    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    10 Monitoring  amp  Controlling a PSI    The Pocket Serial Interface  PSI  is a portable  battery powered IQ interface  It also contains a DSPI and a  standard IQ AUX port which can be monitored and controlled by the  Q System  Its AUX port output makes it very  handy for controlling remote non IQ devices  And the sensing capability of the AUX port input can be used to sense  an external signal  The PSI Control Block screen is shown below in Figure 10 1        Fig  10 1 The PSI Control Block Screen    10 1 Initializing a PSI Control Block   The first step in initializing a PSI control block is to set the IQ address and Crown Bus loop number  This is normally  done automatically during a roll call  However  you can set them manually if you need to configure a system off   line     IQ Address  amp  Crown Bus Loop  The IQ address number you enter must match the physical IQ address  switch setting on the PSI  The Crown Bus loop number must match the physical loop to which the PSI is wired     On Line  The phrase    On Line    will appear in the upper right corner of the in
38.  corner of the information area when an equalizer  is actively connected to and in communication with the IQ System     Model  Location  amp  Purpose  These three text lines are available for you to include relevant notes about  the unit  On the model line you can enter any text up to 13 characters  On the location and purpose lines you can  enter any text up to 19 characters  Only uppercase characters are allowed     7 2 Monitoring an Equalizer  An equalizer can only be monitored from a graphics plate  A sample equalizer GDM  graphic display module  is  shown below in Figure 7 2     Input Output Level  Bar Graphs       Fig  7 2 The Input Output Level Bar Graphs on an Equalizer GDM    Notice in the lower right corner of the GDM that an input  I  and output  O  bar graph is shown for both Channel  Aand B  Note  The actual appearance of your GDM will vary depending on the manufacturer of the equalizer   Of course  you can always create your own custom GDM for an equalizer  See Section 3 9 for instructions on  creating a custom GDM     Page 164    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    7 3 Manual Controls   As mentioned earlier  a few equalizers can be controlled from a control block screen  However  most can only be  controlled from a graphics plate  We will describe both next with a generic example  Please consult your  equalizer   s documentation for instructions specific to your particular model     7 3 1 Manual Control from a Control Block  Use the Device men
39.  crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    background noise may keep the gate open all the time     When a signal exceeds the Threshold  the gate opens almost instantly  The optimum Threshold setting depends  on the signal  Speech varies more rapidly than music  and often needs a lower Threshold to keep the gate open   For a microphone  the Threshold can be seta few decibels above a room   s ambient sound for ambience rejection   or set higher to reject incoming far field or off axis sounds     Tip  The Display screen  press 21  is very helpful when setting the Threshold controls  It displays the input  signal level  making it a simple matter to select an appropriate Threshold level  For example  it is quickly  apparent from the Display screen that the gate will not open if the Threshold control is set at a higher level than  the input signal     Delay Time  The Delay Time control determines how long the gate will stay open after the incoming signal  drops below the Threshold  The optimum Delay Time setting depends on how rapidly the input changes  If a  speaker walks slowly from one mic to another  you will probably want to use a long Delay Time for each mic to  prevent an audibly abrupt cutoff  At a conference however  when debaters compete for microphones  a shorter  Delay Time would probably be more appropriate     The following list shows the possible settings for each Gate function control  Note  All dB settings are dBu   Max Gain  Off   99  dB to  25 dB i
40.  customizable graphics plates     IQ PIP  Programmable input processors that connect a Crown P  P compatible amplifier to an IQ System so  it can be controlled and monitored by the system  Several different models are available with varying features from  basic manual controls to advanced automatic functions and DSP functions     IQ PSI An IQ Pocket Serial Interface that can connect one Crown Bus loop to a single host computer   The IQ   PSI also provides a AUX port      Page 208    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    IQ System A computerized system that uses the IQ command protocol developed by Crown to control and  monitor the various functions of your audio system     LED Agraphic object that serves as an on off indicator and functions like a typical indicator lamp or LED  Light  Emitting Diode      Limiter A function that prevents an audio signal from rising above a Threshold setting  The Input and Output  Compressor Limiter functions will behave like limiters when their Ratio controls are set to co 1  See Compressor  and Ratio also     Line Object A line drawing tool used for aesthetic design of a graphics plate     Link An IQ PLP    multi link    control that connects the controls of two or more amplifiers together so they can be  controlled as a unit  Changing a control of one linked amplifier will cause similar changes to be immediately made  to the other amplifiers in the same link group  There are up to 100 different link channels  allowing many  i
41.  discussion of the use of graphics plates     Tip  Before changing the settings of a sub block  it is a good idea to save the previous settings so you can 2  restore them  if necessary  Press  F1  to save them        2 6 1 Navigating Sub blocks  amp  Setting Controls   In many ways  the sub block controls work the same as control block controls  You set on off  level and range  controls with the same keyboard and mouse techniques  However  sub blocks have many unique features and  this section will describe them  Please refer back to Section 2 5 2 for details of common features such as how to set  individual controls     e Moving from One Sub block or Sub block Screen to Another  Unlike control blocks  sub blocks place no limits on cursor or mouse movement because all the controls pertain to  a single IQ component     Keyboard  You can freely move from one sub block to the next with the f  and g keys or the mouse    3   This  includes Sub block screens for those IQ components that have more than one  Pressing p when you are  already at the bottom of a Sub block screen will send you to the next control at the top of the next Sub block screen  and visa versa  Use p  or p  to move up or down from one Sub block screen to the next  Use f   to move to the    first Sub block screen  Use    to move to the last Sub block screen  Note     Home    f    and    End    f    do not  function in drone Sub block screens     Mouse  Move the mouse  f  up and down without clicking or dragging to
42.  equalization filter  Q is not available for the remaining filter types  The range of  Qis 0 1 to 30  CAUTION  Avoid excessively high Q   s     Gain  Sets the amount of boost or cut for the low pass shelving equalization  high pass shelving equalization  and parametric equalization filters  The gain of the low pass and high pass filters is fixed at unity  The gain of the  low pass equalization and high pass equalization filter is set with Q  The range of the Gain control is  12 dB to    24 dB     Page 131    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Page 132    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    6 Monitoring  amp  Controlling Mixers    There are a variety of IQ mixers  also referred to as    multiplexers    because of their ability to be connected in large  systems while sharing a common bus   One model  the MPX 6  offers only manual control  Another model  the  SMX 6  offers fully automatic as well as manual control  Yet another model  the AMB 5  offers a hybrid approach   one output channel can operate automatically and one output channel requires manual control  But they all share  one thing in common   they use IQ software for configuration  control and monitoring     Each model has its own Control Block screen which is selected in the Device menu    9   Figure 6 1 shows a  single control block from each mixer Control Block screen     MPX 6  SMX 6    AMB 5       Fig  6 1 The Control Block of Each IQ Mixer Model    Overall they are very simil
43.  example  the drone would be monitored and configured as drone 3 in Loop 251     Important  Special wiring must be used for transponder mode  Contact Crown s Technical Support Group if  more information is needed     Page 188    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    9 Monitoring  amp  Controlling Matrixers    There are a variety of IQ matrixers  One model  the MRX 24  offers 24 pairs of low current relay contacts which  can be used to switch microphone  audio line level  digital and DC control signals  Another model  the MRX 12   offers 12 single high current relay contacts which can be used to switch loudspeaker lines  motors  lighting and  power supplies  Both of these models also have slave versions  MRX 24S and MRX 12S  which add to the  number of relays  thereby expanding the possible size of a matrix     All matrixer models share a common Control Block screen as shown in Figure 9 1 below     Pi  HA  Hig  P  Par  Hs  H  L  F   Hs  Haat  L  F   HA  H  L  Fat       Fig  9 1 The Matrixer Control Block Screen    9 1 Initializing a Matrixer Control Block   The first step in initializing a matrixer control block is to set the IQ address and Crown Bus loop number  This is  normally done automatically during a roll call  However  you can set them manually if you need to configure a  system off line     IQ Address  amp  Crown Bus Loop  The IQ address number you enter must match the physical IQ address  switch setting on the matrixer  The Crown Bus loop number must
44.  files are   TURBO14 EXE The Turbo program   TURBO13 GXL Alibrary file consisting of fonts  graphic images  and other associated material   RTM EXE A memory manager required by Turbo   s protected mode   DPMI16BI 0VL ADPMI server required for the protected mode     Page 14    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    TURBO14 PIF Asample PIF file for running Turbo under Microsoft Windows  refer to the Appendix    TURBO14 ICO Anicon file that can be used with Microsoft Windows          OIF Several object information files  ending with the extension OIF  are provided for various IQ2  compatible components       GDM Several graphic display module files  ending with the extension GDM  are provided for       various IQ2 compatible components      H  PCX Several bitmap files  ending with the extension PCX  are provided to support the graphic  display modules of various IQ2 compatible components     1 5 For Experienced Users  If you are already an experienced Turbo user  you may be eager to begin using Turbo without reading further   Feel free to do so and refer to the manual as needed  To run the program  type turbo14 on the DOS  command line after it has been installed     One important change to note is that gs   the S key  is no longer used to enter a negative number    negative  numbers are now indicated by preceeding the number with the minus key     1 6 What   s New in Version 1 4      Support for new  Q2 components like the SLM 8 system and load monitor and new IQ
45.  for all AMB 5s but only for those SMX 6s with  version 1 3 firmware or later   To see which firmware version your SMX 6 has  locate the white sticker above the  DB 25 serial communication connector on the back panel of the unit  Units with version 1 3 firmware will be labeled     V 1 3      The Compression control can be set either    Fast    or    Slow    to control the attack time of the Input  Compressor Limiter function     Set the Compression control to    Fast    to cause the mixer to have the shortest attack time possible  This will be very  fast   so fast that the compressor can stop extremely sudden loud transients like the sound caused by a dropped  microphone  This is a good setting for rapid speech     Set the Compression control to    Slow    for more gentle sound sources such as most music  When the    Slow    setting    Page 146    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    is used  the Release Time cannot be set any less than 0 4 seconds to avoid noticeable pumping of the Input  Compressor Limiter function     The following list shows the possible settings for each Input Compressor Limiter function control  Note  All dB  settings are dBu    Compress  On Off   Threshold  Off   99  dB to  25 dB in  2 dB steps   Ratio  1 1  2 1  4 1  8 1  16 1  32 1  00 1    Release Time  0 2  Fast compression only   0 4  0 6  0 8  1  1 5  2  3  4  6  8  10  12  15  20   30 seconds    Compression  Fast Slow    6 4 4 Auto Level Function    Figure 6 12  Unlike the Input
46.  from either a control block or a graphics plate     8 2 1 Monitoring from a Control Block   The indicators in the drone control block are only useful when a drone is connected to the system  The indicators  can be ignored when configuring a drone that is off line or disconnected  Please refer to Figure 8 1 during this  section     Analog Data  The relative input voltage level  AC or DC  of each analog input is displayed under the    Analog  Data    section at the top of the drone control block  The analog data indicators have a range from 0 to 255  255  represents the maximum input of 10 volts  Note  The sensitivity of the analog inputs can be changed with resistor  substitution  See the Drone Hardware Installation Manual for details     AUX System Digital Data  The status of both the AUX inputs and outputs are displayed under the    Aux  System Digital Data    heading  The first line  labelled    Output     shows which outputs are being driven with an output  signal  When one of the 16 outputs has been turned on  either by the drone   s programming or manually   the  indicator will be displayed at full height  If the output is turned off  the indicator will be displayed at half height     The second line  labelled    Input     shows which AUX inputs have data returning to them  If a logic high is sensed  at a AUX input  the indicator will display at full height  If a logic low is detected it will display at half height     8 2 2 Monitoring from a Graphics Plate    Adrone ca
47.  manually control a drone when its ASA control is on     8 4 Control Block Shortcuts    Several keyboard shortcuts are available to make it easier to work with the drone control block and sub blocks   They are functional only from the drone control block   not the sub blocks     pre  pre  pre  rte                Jump to the 1st Sub block screen  Drone Aux Input Setup   Jump to the 2nd Sub block screen  Simplex Input Commands   Jump to the 3rd Sub block screen  Analog Input Commands   Jump to the 4th Sub block screen  Binary Input Commands   Jump to the 5th Sub block screen  Aux Output Commands     Jump to the 6th Sub block screen  Paralyze Commands     Note  The above shortcuts allow you to jump only to the specific Sub block screen listed  After using a shortcut   you must return to the control block before jumping to a different Sub block screen     ene    Page 172     also pm     1  Flush or remove all user programming stored inside the drone     Toggle the ASA control on and off     IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    8 5 Training a Drone   The real power of the drone lies in its ability to be trained to control an  Q System  Once trained  a drone can  function much like a host computer and control other IQ components in the system  Although    training    a drone is  really programming it  you don   t have to know anything about programming languages  Training a drone is  simply a matter of linking desired IQ commands to the appropriate drone inputs and
48.  match the physical loop to which the matrixer is  wired  Note  Slave matrixers will have two numbers listed in the IQ address space  The first number is the IQ  address of the master unit followed by     S    and the slave address number  Each slave matrixer must have a  unique number     On Line  The phrase    On Line    will appear in the upper right corner of the information area when a matrixer  is actively connected to and in communication with the IQ System     Page 189    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Model  Location  amp  Purpose  These three text lines are available for you to include relevant notes about  the unit  Up to 11 characters can be entered on each line     24 12  The 24 12 parameter  located at the bottom of the center column of each matrixer control block  is used to  identify the matrixer model  This parameter must be manually set since all matrixers appear alike to the  Q System   It has only two settings     24    and    12     Use the    Space Bar    to toggle it from one setting to the other  Use    24    for  MRX 24 and MRX 24S models  Use    12    for MRX 12 and MRX 12S models     9 2 Using a Control Block to Monitor  amp  Control a Matrixer   The simplest way to monitor or control a matrixer is from its control block  The matrixer controls within it serve the  dual purpose of both showing their on off state and allowing the user to control their state  Section 9 1 described  how to initialize a matrixer control block  Th
49.  move up and down the sub blocks and  Sub block screens     e Moving Among Sub blocks of Similar Components   Keyboard  Press p   and gej 4 gt    to move sideways from the sub block of one IQ component to the next   This can only be done between similar IQ components  For example  you can move from the sub block of one  SMX 6 mixer to another  but not from an SMX 6 to an AMB 5  Note  This feature is only supported for amplifier  and mixer sub blocks  It is not supported by drone sub blocks     e Locally Copying  amp  Pasting in a Mixer Sub block   The local copy and paste feature allows you to copy the setting of one input control to another  It is only available  for mixer sub blocks  it only works with adjacent columns and it is only available for input controls  It cannot be  used for output controls like the Limit Threshold control of the SMX 6 Output Compress Limiter     Page 35    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Keyboard  Select the desired control setting  Then  press s  t      or ss t  2  to copy the setting horizontally  across the sub block  For example  the  5 dB Max Gain setting was copied from Input 2  Channel 1 in Figure 2 19  to the other inputs by pressing p            Mouse  First select the desired control setting  Then  press and hold gs t  and move the mouse  f  to the left or  right to copy the values horizontally across the sub block     e Globally Copying  amp  Pasting Between IQ Components  The global copy and paste function cop
50.  only   Legacy IQ PI P s simply  display the word    Amplifier    in place of the IQ P  P model name   To manually configure the model  move the  cursor over the model name and press the    Space Bar or ge   A list of available models will appear as shown  in Figure 5 3  Select the appropriate model and press the    Space Bar    again     IQ Address  amp  Crown Bus Loop  These two parameters can be manually entered for any model IQ PIP   The IQ address number you enter must match the physical IQ address switch setting on the IQ P  P The Crown  Bus loop number must match the physical loop to which the IQ PIP is wired     On Line  The phrase    On Line    will appear in the upper right corner of the information area when an IQ PI P   is actively connected to and in communication with the  Q System     Model  The amplifier model must be manually selected from a list for legacy IQ P  Ps   The model name cannot  be typed in by hand   Itis automatically entered for  Q2 PI P s that are installed into PIP2 compatible amplifiers and  manually selected from a list for  Q2 P  Ps that are installed in legacy P  P amplifiers  To select an amplifier from    Page 116    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    ae Wai da lh  li inn        Fig  5 3 Available IQ2 PI P Models List    the list  first move the cursor to the model field and then press the    Space Bar    or ge   The list shown in Figure  5 4 below will appear  Select the desired amplifier from the list and press    Sp
51.  outputs     A drone can be trained either from its six Sub block screens or from a graphics plate  Figure 8 3 shows the Drone  Object Attributes window which is used to train a drone from a graphics plate     A drone is trained from a graphics plate by creating a container for each input and or output and then placing       Fig  8 3 The Drone Object Attributes Window    relevant control objects inside the containers  The control objects represent the various functions that will be acted  upon when the drone input or output is activated  Objects placed inside a drone container are linked to the input  or output which the container represents     However  using the drone sub blocks to train a drone is the most direct method because graphics plate objects  need not be created  The remainder of this section will use the sub block method  To switch to the drone Sub block  screens  select the ASA control in the Control Block screen and press either gter  or fz   Section 8 4 also lists the  shortcuts that make it possible to jump directly to a single drone Sub block screen  The first drone Sub block  screen is shown in Figure 8 4     The first drone Sub block screen allows you to configure each AUX Input  It is followed by five drone Sub block  command screens with the following titles  Simplex Input Commands  Analog Input Commands  Binary Input  Commands  Aux Output Commands and Paralyze Commands     A description of the drone Sub block screens and their associated controls are de
52.  plates              Graytics Plate Superset    A                                    Cow Bow      N Sws Bo                         CES  Cons Back AERA Conca Ried Si  Conca Blok WQS Conca Blok ERE                Cousot B       Conti Bok                ASA    Sub block                       A single dataframe file contains  the control block and sub block  settings for all the IQ components  in the system as well as all  custom graphics plates           Fig  2 7 Putting Text Screens and Graphics Plates into Perspective    Notice that the control blocks  located in the center of the frame  form the bedrock of the software  Below them are  the sub blocks which expand to cover the automation functions of those IQ components that have them  The  Q  System can be configured entirely from the control block and sub block text screens  At the top of the frame are the  graphics plates which serve as a user interface layer  Because you can determine which controls are available    on each graphics plate  you can shield operators from the complexity of the system     When you save an  Q System setup to disk with the Turbo software  you create a dataframe file  A single  dataframe file will store all the system settings and all the graphics plates you created for that setup  Figure 2 7  depicts dataframe files as frames in a movie film  You    engage    dataframes to change the configuration of your  audio system much the same way that frames of a movie change the action in the film     Pa
53.  restore the system to its original state  When you make a backup copy  either give it a different  extension or move it to a different directory because Turbo will continue to try and use it if it sees it in the same  directory with an OIF extension in its file name     3 9 2 Exit and Restart Turbo   After creating the OIF  you will need to exit Turbo and restart it so it will incorporate the new OIF   Turbo searches  for OIFs during its startup procedure  It only searches the Turbo14 directory so the new OIF must be located  there   Then return to the graphics plate and continue with the next step     3 9 3 Creating a GDM Container  Next  open the Toolbox  f   and select the GDM Container object  The GDM Container Attributes window will  appear as is shown in Figure 3 24     If you were successful in creating an OIF  you should see the description of the IQ component listed in the window   Select it and then set the attributes listed next  Note  At this time it is not necessary to enter a Crown Bus loop or  IQ address number because this is anew GDM which we have not yet completed  Later when you call up the  completed GDM for actual use  you will need to enter this information so the GDM will know which amplifier to  control     Background  Sets the background color of the GDM Container     Page 64    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    GRA Comtaiaer Attributes     E  Bowler     Soa le    Fig  3 24 GDM Container Attributes Window       PCX File name  Sets
54.  the Device menu     Q  to go to the graphics plate Control Block screen  shown below in Figure 2 23         Fig  2 23 The Graphics Plate Control Block Screen    Like most control blocks  the graphics plate control blocks are divided into two parts  On the left is the information  area and on the right are the controls     Number  The Number parameter is the first item in the information side of the control block  It provides a  convenient way to differentiate one graphics plate from another  Enter any number between 1 and 999  Three  blank lines are available below the Number parameter for labelling the graphics plate or for relevant notes     Trigger  Determines whether or not the associated graphics plate will be automatically displayed when a  dataframe file is engaged  This is a great feature for hiding the complexity of Turbo from your operators  All they  see is the controls you give them on the graphics plate  When Trigger is turned on  the text Control Block screens  will be bypassed and the graphics plate will be displayed instead  When Trigger is turned off  Turbo will stay in the  Control Block screens after a dataframe file is engaged  The Trigger of only one graphics plate should be turned  on at a time  If more then one is turned on  the graphics plate having the lowest Offset will be displayed  Note  If  you turn on a Trigger  or change any parameter   be sure to save the dataframe file by pressing 9  so the  change s  will not be lost     Display Now  Causes 
55.  the GDM Container  To edit the GDM you will need to open its Attributes  window again and press the Edit button  You will then be able to edit the objects in the GDM  Important   Don t forget to return to the GDM Container Attributes window once more at the end to save the changes     The next time you ask for a GDM for a legacy IQ PI P you will get your custom GDM in place of the original  standard GDM  Figure 3 29 below shows several of the new GDMs side by side  each one controlling a different  amplifier           BS Sa RRR Boe  BARWED Ea eae  Ba Se BER Bo                Fig  3 29 The New GDM Replaces the Standard One That Came With Turbo    Page 68    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    3 10 Saving a Graphics Plate  We briefly addressed storing and saving a graphics plate in Section 2 8 2  However  before leaving the subject  of Designing Graphics Plates  it is appropriate to address the saving of graphics plates more thoroughly     During the normal operation of Turbo the settings of all controls are stored in memory  When a new dataframe file  is opened  the settings contained within it  including the contents and attributes of all graphics plates  replace the  ones in memory  So the settings stored in memory represent the current state of the IQ System   There are a few  exceptions  such as when a drone makes changes to the system independently of the host computer  But those  exceptions are beyond the scope of this discussion      When a dataframe 
56.  the PCX image  with the one it uses  It does this by dithering the existing colors to try to emulate a larger color palette     AContainer object is a box that can hold other objects  As a result  objects within it are linked to it so they move and  resize along with the Container  An empty Container object is shown in Figure 4 23     Fig  4 23 A Sample Empty Container Object    The example in Figure 4 24 shows an MRX 24 matrixer control panel that was created using a Container object     The Text and Button objects were placed in the Container to create the control panel  Each of the smaller Buttons  was assigned to one of the MRX 24 relays     L 2  2   E    PH  fHOH OOOO TG  rPOOHOOOG     FOO OOO  Cj     HOHEAGAG  WEH  Gti L   i    Fig  4 24 A Sample Container Used to Create an MRX 24 Control Panel    Moving or resizing a Container causes all the objects  except for Text objects with bitmap fonts  within it to move or  be proportionally resized along with it  This makes Containers useful for grouping objects     It is possible to place a Container around existing objects without linking to them  Placing a Container on top of  existing objects results in the Container moving behind the objects  The result looks as if the objects and the  Container are linked but moving or resizing the Container has no affect on the objects in front of it  To correct this     Page 89    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    crown    click on the top edge of each object  This causes
57.  the Snap to Object feature  Section 3 2  has been turned on  an object that is moved will snap into alignment  when if it is placed in close proximity to another object  This can be prevented by pressing ys  t when the mouse  button is released at the end of the move     Multiple objects can be temporarily grouped so they can be moved as a unit  To select multiple objects  lasso them  by pressing jst  and dragging     the pointer until all desired objects are touched by the dotted line  Releasing    Page 56    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    the mouse button causes a box to appear around the group  In the example shown in Figure 3 16  the legend  panel and left two amplifier GDMs are grouped        Fig  3 16 Grouping Multiple Objects    Note  Begin the lasso on an empty part of the graphics plate to the upper left of the group     To move a group  move the pointer to the top middle of the group until it turns into a cross hair  Then  drag the  group to the new location  Figure 3 17   Upon releasing the mouse button  the objects will be ungrouped  If all  objects are not the same height  move the cross hair to the tallest one  click and drag            Fig  3 17 Moving a Group of Objects    Note  Moving is the only operation that can be performed on grouped objects        Page 57    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    3 3 4    Autosizing    an Object   Autosizing makes it possible to cause an object to automatically assume the size of a
58.  the file name of an image that will be displayed in the background of the GDM  Container  The ability to display an image in the background of the GDM Container is a very useful feature  It can  display your company logo  It can have a picture of a control panel that you complete by adding control objects  as described in Section 3 9 4     Only PCX bitmap files are supported and you will have to use a third party paint or graphics program to create  the PCX file  If you use this feature  we recommend that the image have a color depth no higher than the one you  are using for the graphics plate  see also Section 3 2   For example  if your graphics plate is set to use 256 colors   we recommend that the internal palette of the PCX image also have no more than 256 colors  It sometimes works  best if the image has an internal palette with fewer colors  For example  use a 16 color PCX with a 256 color  graphics plate  This sometimes gives Turbo a better chance of matching the colors correctly in your image     If you decide to use a PCX image  you must keep a copy of the PCX file in the Turbo14 directory  The PCX file   itself  is only linked to    not embedded into the container  Whenever the GDM Container is displayed  Turbo  searches for the PCX file so it can read it and display it in the container  If you ever decide to distribute copies of  your custom GDM to others  you will need to include copies of all PCX files that are used     Border  Determines whether or not the bord
59.  the individual responsible for installing and config   uring the system and its software  It explains the features of Turbo but it does not tell you how to use them  Because  the details of specific audio systems vary widely  this manual does not attempt to be an operation manual for your  system  It is assumed that the  Q System Administrator  or whatever title you choose to use  will provide proper  training to the operators in the specifics of the audio system and this software  Crown offers an IQ School to  assist with the training and certification of IQ System designers  installers and administrators  Please contact us if  you would like more information about our IQ training program     Before installing Turbo  we recommend that you read the installation instructions  Experienced users can then  skip to relevant sections later in the manual to learn about specific software features for various IQ components   The Using Turbo Section is intended for first time Turbo users who would like an overview of the program before  delving into the details     In order to limit the scope of this manual  a few assumptions are made on the part of the user  First  the user is  assumed to be knowledgeable in the use of personal computers and is familiar with principles of audio and  Q  Systems  Second  the user is assumed to understand the requirements for his her audio application and is able  to determine the system settings to achieve the desired results     Page 12    IQ MSD Turb
60.  the strobe input signals that itis time to read the inputs in the binary channel  The strobe must then cycle  through another on off cycle before the channel will be read again     Important  Each input can only be used in one mode at time  When an input has been set for binary operation   it cannot be used in simplex mode  Also  a binary input can be grouped into only one channel at a time   it cannot  be used in two channels at the same time     Page 174    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    8 5 2 Simplex Mode Assignments   In simplex mode  a logic input is treated as a stand alone signal  Each simplex input acts as a simple on off switch  to interface to the    hardware switches    or controls of the outside world  If all 16 AUX inputs are set to simplex mode   then up to 16 different controls can be connected to the drone  one to each input  Note  It is also possible to use  analog inputs as simplex AUX inputs  This makes it possible to have a total of 32 AUX controls  This will be  explained later  For example  an on off switch connected to one input can be used to signal that all amplifiers need  to be turned on or off  Asecond one can be used to turn on the Auto Level function of an SMX 6  A third one can  be used to make system wide changes to several IQ components  etc     To assign one or more commands to a simplex AUX input  first use e7  g  to advance to the command Sub   block screen titled    Simplex Input Commands    as shown in Figure 8 5  
61.  them to link to the Container behind them     When drawing Containers that overlap  an existing Container is usually layered behind the new one  as shown  in Figure 4 25     Older Container    Newer Container       k    Fig  4 25 Normally New Containers Are Layered on Top of Older Containers    It is possible to move a rear Container in front of another Container  First  move the pointer over the rear  Container  Then press m  and click      on it to bring it to the front     Move Pointer Over ET   6  Desired Container      Fig  4 26 Moving a Container to the Front of Another Container    Note  To change the attributes of an object after it has been created  click on it with the right mouse button         Page 90    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    4 9 Clock   The Clock object provides a numerical display of the time  To place a Clock ona graphics plate  choose Clock from  the Toolbox  The Clock Attributes window  Figure 4 27  will then open so you can configure it  Its attributes are  described below     Clook Attributed     Fookgrousd  umm    Text i       Fig  4 27 The Clock Attributes Window    Background  Sets the background color of the Clock  The border is not affected by the background color   Text  Sets the text foreground color of the Clock     The time is displayed as Hours Minutes Seconds AM PM  A sample is shown in Figure 4 28     11 00 32 pm  Fig  4 28 A Sample Clock    Note  To change the attributes of an object after it has been created  c
62.  to drive a    power    LED to indicate on a remote control panel that an amplifier is turned on  A wide variety of things  can be monitored by the drone and used to turn an AUX output on or off     The Aux Output Commands Sub block screen is located between the Binary Input Commands Sub block screen  and Paralyze Commands Sub block screen  It is used to assign monitor functions to any of the 16 AUX outputs     To assign one or more commands to a logic output  first use rer p   to advance to the command Sub block  screen titled    AUX Output Commands     Then select the Add button  The window in Figure 8 10 will appear     Only one monitor function can be assigned to an output at a time with the command window but you can assign  as many functions as you want to an output by repeating the steps described next and assigning additional  commands to the same input     L  Lp   PIF I4AP i    oe os ii       Fig  8 10 Adding a Command Assignment to an AUX Output    Output    The drone AUX output number     Components  The Components list is used to select the IQ component that will be monitored by the drone  output  All a component needs to be included in the list is a control block   it does not have to be on line to appear  in the list  By including off line components it is possible to preconfigure a drone before it is connected to an actual  IQ System     Available Functions  The Available Functions list is used to select the function of the selected IQ  component that will be m
63.  to make system wide changes  change  graphics plates or open and close mini plates     Click Press and release a mouse button once     4     usually the left mouse button     CLN The Crown Local Net is a specialized RS422 communication loop  It provides local communication  between IQ components apart from the Crown Bus  It can be used to share information  such as input gating   between several SMX 6 mixers     Coerce The coerce function is used to force all amplifier attenuation settings in the system to either the highest   coerce up  or lowest  coerce down  setting     COM 1  COM 2 RS232 serial communication ports in a PC are referred to as    COM    ports  Most PCs have  two  COM 1 and COM 2     Component  IQ System An electronic component controlled by a microcomputer for the purpose of  performing a specific task in an  Q System     Compressor A function that reduces an audio signal when it rises above a Threshold setting  Both the SMX   6 and AMB 5 include Input and Output Compressor Limiter functions  The compression Ratio control sets the  amount of compression that will be applied for every step over the Threshold  See Limiter  Ratio and Threshold  also     Container Agraphic box that is used to visually group two or more graphic objects together  It is used for purely  aesthetic purpose and it is the only graphic object that can be placed behind other objects in a graphics plate   Special containers  GDM and Drone Containers  also link their contents to a particu
64.  to monitor  signal levels  There are a couple of ways to monitor them which will be describe next     6 2 1 Monitoring from a Display Screen  A quick way to monitor a single IQ mixer is to go to a Display screen by pressing   2  from the mixer Control Block  screen  A sample is shown below in Figure 6 2     The Display screens of SMX 6 and AMB 5 mixers provide dynamic representation of the peak audio level of    SHE    HAT    Fig  6 2 The SMX 6 Display Screen    ia  ha  aA  LH  Hi  Li       each input and output channel as well as the net gain setting of each input  Figure 6 3 shows just one of these input  channels and labels its various parts  The parts are described next     Address  amp  Loop  The IQ address and Crown Bus loop number of the mixer is shown in the lower left corner  of the Display screen underneath the scale     Input Signal Level  The center bar graph in each input section represents the preprocessed input audio  level  It is a multicolor bar graph which is green below  1 5 dB  yellow between  1 5 dB and  18 dB and red  above  18 dB  Signals below    40 dB are not visible  The level is preprocessed similar to a prefader or cue level  on a traditional mixing console     Net Gain  To the left and right of the input level bar graph are the blue Channel 1 and 2 net gain bar graphs   If the gain is being manually controlled  ASA is off   this bar graph will represent the manual input gain setting  In  this case it can also be increased and decreased from the D
65.  to pass     Aux Most IQ components have an AUX port so non IQ components can be signalled or turned on and off  When  turned on   10 VDC is provided at the output of the AUX port  The AUX port circuitry is also capable of sensing  an input signal     Bar Meter A graphic object that dynamically displays a level  such as an audio input level  with a moving  vertical bar graph  All bar meters have an optional peak hold indicator attribute     Baud Rate Aunit of measure of the transmission speed of a communication system equal to one bit per second   Turbo supports a transmission speed up to 38 400 baud between the IQ interface and the host computer  The  transmission speed of a Crown Bus loop wired with twisted pair wiring is 38 400 baud     Break Detection A feature that automatically reports when breaks occur in Crown Bus loops  It also attempts  to identify the location of a break     Page 203    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Bus All mixers have a switchable    bus    audio output for each channel  They receive the same post processed  audio signal that the main audio outputs receive  The bus outputs are isolated with relays and are independently  buffered with separate output drivers  enabling them to be tied together into a large monitoring or paging    bus        Button A graphic object that acts like a push button to control an on off or toggle function  such as turning an  amplifier channel on and off   Special System Buttons are also available
66.  up to reveal hidden controls  etc  With Turbo  you have the capability to configure your  IQ System in a very wide variety of ways to suit its needs and the needs of your operators  See the Object  Reference  Section 4  for a complete description of all the available objects     GH   GH 2    i  E  T    Be Es    BR Ga RHEE Boe    Fig  3 27 The Assembled Custom GDM    At some point you may want to resize the new GDM  If you resize the GDM Container as described in Section  3 3 2  all of the objects inside it  except text objects with bitmap fonts  will also be resized  To prevent this  resize the  container as described in Section 3 3 2 but press and hold down the g  key when your release the mouse  button and the objects inside it will not change     Page 67    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    3 9 5 Saving the GDM   Now that the GDM has been assembled  it must be saved  Right click  3  on the GDM Container and let s return  to the GDM Container Attributes window  Figure 3 24   Press the Save button and the following dialog box   Figure 3 28  will open to prompt you for the GDM file name     Ester mine W GEH File fee          Fig  3 28 The Custom GDM Save Dialog Box    Enter the same file name you used in the OIF  You do not need to include the extension GDM because it will be  automatically added     After the GDM has been saved you will not be able to edit it  This is to prevent an operator from accidentally  changing the size or location of an object in
67.  uses the On color when the function it monitors is turned off  and visa versa     Blink  Causes the LED color to blink when the function it monitors is turned on  or off if the Invert attribute is turned  on      Border  Causes the LED to use a three dimensional border that gives it a raised appearance  This border is  not affected by the color attributes  It is sometimes desirable to turn off the border when the LED is placed inside a  container  This causes it to blend into the container  See Figure 4 15 for some samples of LEDs with and without  a border     E     Fig  4 15 Sample LED Objects    Four sample LEDs are shown above  The two on the left are off and the two on the right are on  The smaller LEDs  have not border  This illustrates a characteristic of LEDs   even if the Border attribute is turned on  the border will  disappear when the LED is resized very small  When this happens  resizing the LED to a larger size will restore  the border     Tip  You can add text to an LED that remains invisible until the LED is turned on  To do this  make the text the  same color as the Off color     If desired  more than one LED can be linked to the same function of the same IQ component  For example  you  can create four LEDs to indicate the status of the Channel 1  OC circuitry of the same amplifier     To change the attributes of an object after it has been created  click on it with the right mouse button    3      Page 84    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crow
68. 0 dB equals 0 dBu     Out  A numeric readout of the relative signal level of each amplifier output channel  The indicator can report a  range from 0 to  50 dB  A reading of 0 dB is the maximum peak output level of the amplifier into an 8 ohm load  The  level numbers displayed represent the dB level below the 0 dB reference  Note  The Out level must be properly  scaled for each amplifier model or else it will display an incorrect level  Some older legacy IQ PI P s use scaling  resistors that must be configured when the PLP is installed into the amplifier Most IQ2 PI Ps are scaled by  software with the amplifier Model setting in the information area of the control block     IOC  This indicator mimics the OC  Input Output Comparator  indicator LED on the front of the amplifier  As long  as distortion  of any kind  does not exceed 0 05   the indicator of each channel will read    Ok     However  if  distortion ever exceeds 0 05   the indicator will read    IOC    to alert you that the amplifier channel is beginning to  distort  See your amplifier   s Reference Manual for more information about IOC     ODEP  A numeric readout of the Output Device Emulation Protection status of each amplifier channel  It is  displayed as a percentage  Subtract the reading from 100  to find the remaining thermodynamic energy  headroom  When ODEP displays    100     the amplifier has reached its maximum heat dissipation capacity for its  operating environment and ODEP limiting will begin  See your am
69. 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6  ch 1 Ch 2 Ch ilCh 2 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 1 Ch 2     MAX GAIN ol ol  sl a  S  SN  5I SASL a S  5I  LOW SET  40   401  40   40   401  40   40   40   401  40   401  40l  GATE onl Onl onl onl Onl Onl onl On  Onl Onl onl Onl  THRESHOLD  30   301  301  30   30   30   30   301  30   301  30   30l  DELAY TIME el 2  20    22 sal eels 4 2il taal 21    aal iaa     2l  DUCK PRIORITY Onl onl onl onl onl onl onl orl onl onl onl onl  PRIORITY LEVEL ol ol ol ol ol ol ol ol ol ol ol 0             Fig  2 28 A Portion of a Sample Printout    2 11 Checking Memory  To determine the amount of available memory  press g         This can be used from either a text Control Block  screen  Figure 2 29  or a graphics plate  Figure 2 30         Fig  2 29 Checking Available Memory from a Control Block Screen    Reep owallable  2559916       Fig  2 30 Checking Available Memory from a Graphics Plate    Page 44    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    3 Designing Graphics Plates    Fortunately you don   t have to be an artist to create an attractive graphics plate because we have included a wide  array of pre made graphic objects which are easy to use  They are listed in the graphics plate Toolbox  see  Figure 2 22   We ve also included a number of pre configured objects for many IQ components  We call them  GDMs or Graphic Display Modules because they graphically display many of the monitor and control features of  our IQ components  Befo
70. 134   PSI 193   system  amp load monitor 195  input 73  76  79  81  83  92  139  176  182  input compressor 128  inputcompressor imiter 146 147  input drive level 127  input signal level 134  installation 14 15   system requirements 12    Page 218    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    interface 169   interrupt 25   invert 84   inverted 77  178  185  IOC 118  119  128  208  IQ interface 23 24  25  IQ PI P 115 131  208  IQ PIP  model 116   IQ System 209  IQ CAG 208   IQ INT 208   IQ MSD 208  IQ MSD Sys Config 208  IQ MSD Turbo 208  IQ PSI 208    L   label 200   LED 83 84  209   leftX axis 109   legend 72 74   level 77 79  80  81  119  165  166  level  priority  145   level control 33   limitthreshold 151   limiter 209   line 103  209   link 122  209   loading a dataframe 42  94  209  location  amp  purpose 117   lock 138  165  166  209   log X axis 109   logic input 174   loop 97  119  134  169  189  193  195  low set 143  209   low pass equalization filter 130  low pass filter 130  165  167  low pass shelving equalization filter 130    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    M  manual controls 121 124  138 140  165 167  171 172   201   master 155   matrixer 178  185  189 191  209   max 73   max allowable open mics 153   max gain 142  143  209   max gain to track control block 142  209   max min level 183   memory 40  44 45  69  167   Microsoft Windows 213 214   min 73   mini plate 94  100 102  209   mixer 177  178  183  185  209   mixers 133 161   mode  11
71. 213  places 93   plate 96   plotter 108 110  111 210   pol  polarity  122 210   poll 74   port active 26   pot 73 75  210   power 119  122 210   printer port 29   printing 43   programmable filters 129 131   PSI  pocket serial interface  193 194    Q  Q filter  131 211    R   range control 33   ratio 128  146  211  reaction time 148  211  read only 113   recall 167   reference 200   refresh 74 77  93  113  relative 77  179   relay 76  83   relay on off controls 190  release time 126  128  146  152  211  remote emergency mute 27  report via AUX 128  resizing a container 89  resolution 20  199  restore  graphics plate  41  rightX axis 109   roll call 23 24  26  211  RS232 211   RS422 211    Page 220    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    S   save  saving a custom GDM 68  98  saving a dataframe 42  saving a graphics plate 69  saving a mini plate 101   scale 65  88  98  101   screen background 41   search 27   sel  select  121  138  165  211   select component window 53   select mini plate window 95   serial port 25   setup 201   setup  drone  107   setup  plotter  108   short 128   shortcuts 172   signal delay 129   SLM 8 195 202  211   smooth output limiter 126 127   SMxXinterrupts 156   SMX max gain auto compensation 27   SMX 6 133 161  177  183  185  211   snap to grid 51   snap to object 51  56   software 211   solo 122  211   solo function enabled 27   spin control 92 93  211   stand by 127   start 200  201   startfreq 199   starting Turbo 22 23   stop 200   sto
72. 5  204  clock 91   close mini plate 94   coerce 204   color 59  74  77  80  82  83  91  92  96  108  111  113  comm port 95  204   command  amp  title bar 31   command line parameters 22  communication 23 24    Page 215       crown    componentlist 72  73  76  79  81  83  92  97  113  components 176  182  184  204  208   compress 146   compression 146   compression ratio 151   compressor 204   container 64 66  88 90  204    control block 18 21  30 33  118  121 122  138  165 166   170  171  190  194  196  204    control block override 142  204  control panel 18  25   control security lock  graphics plate  39  205  convert 66  89  98  101   copy 179   copy  amp  paste 35  36  countlevel 153 205   Crown Bus 26  205  CROWN DTA 29   CTS  clear to send  23   cursor 74   cursor to handle 74   curve 109  111 112  205   curve color 111   Curve screen 196 197  200    D   DAOL  desired avearge output level  148  205  dataframe file 17  21  26  29  31 42  69  94  95  205  decay time 127  160 205   defer send 93   delay 77  129   delay time 144 205   delete 179   device 205   Device menu 30  205   DIF 202   digital meter 81 82  205    Page 216    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    direction 103  display  graphics plate  40  205  display now  graphics plate  39  205  Display screen 19  118 119  134 136  205  display system parameter 26  distributed intelligence 205  DOS 213  double click 206  download 206  drag 206  DRN 16 169 188  185  206  drone 185  206  analog inputs setup
73. 6   model  location  amp  purpose 134  164  169  190  193  195   modify 179   momentary 178   monitor 201  monitoring adrone 170 171  monitoring a matrixer 190  monitoring a mixer 134 137  monitoring a PSI 194  monitoring an amplifier 118 120  monitoring an equalizer 164  system  amp  load monitor 196 198   monitor speaker 198  201   monitor system parameter 26   moveable when locked 101   MPX 6 133 161  177  183  185  209   MRX 178  185  209   MRX 12 189 191   MRX 12S 189 191   MRX 24 189 191   MRX 24S 189 191   multiple drones 188   mute 122  157 158  166  210         crown    N   name 101   negative numbers 15  netgain 134  number 39   numeric 93    O   object type 104   objects 71 114   ODEP 118  119  128  210   ODEP conservation 126  off pass 200   off report 200   offset number 31 210   OIF  object information file  63 64  online 116  133  164  169  189  193  195  210  on offbutton 76 78  204   on off control 33   onlofflevel 179   online search 26   open mini plate 94   open toidle gain 210   open tolast position 210   osc enable 198   osc frequency 199   out 118   output 167  171  184   output compressorilimiter 151 152  output limit 152   output signal level 135    P   PIP  programmable input processor  115 131  210  palette 41 59   paralyze 186 187   paralyze button  drone  106   parametric equalization filter 130   PCX file 65  88  97  100    Page 219    crown    peak hold 80  210   peak indicators  graphics plate  41  peak only 82   PIF  program information file  
74. 8  trig 201  trigger  graphics plate  39  212  trigger level 126  TSR 212    Page 221      crown    TURBO INI 29  188  turn offtime 127   turn ontime 127  type  filter  130  typeface 212    U   UART 12  212  UCODE 113  212  upload 212   use analog as AUX 176    V   variable color 41  212  variable palette 41  view curve 200    WwW   warning 127   when paralyzed 186  when unparalyzed 187  width 93  114    Page 222    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    
75. Advanced IQ System Software crown    7    8       Fig  3 6 A Graphics Plate with a Stadium Picture in the Background    Click  3  on the Display control to go to the new graphics plate  Itwill be empty  except for the background  picture  if one is used  and the Crown IQ logo in the lower right corner of the screen     Press m   to open the graphics Plate Attributes window  Figure 3 7   Use the following descriptions  to help you configure the attribute settings     Flate Attributes  E  aap To Ohfect   Grid Width   O Smp To Grid Geld Height    E  Shows Grid    Fig  3 7 The Graphics Plate Attributes Window       Snap to Object  Causes an object to automatically align itself with another object when it is placed in  very close proximity to it  within a few pixels   This attribute must be turned on for the autosize feature  discussed in Section 3 3 4 to work     Snap to Grid  Causes objects that are moved to    snap     jump  to a grid location defined by the Grid  Width and Grid Height attributes     Page 51    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Grid Width  Sets the width of the grid in pixels   A pixel is the smallest dot of light that can be controlled  on your display  considering the video resolution settings of your system   s host computer      Grid Height  Sets the height of the grid in pixels   Show Grid  Causes the grid to be visible  It is displayed with grey lines that are one pixel wide  An  example of a grid whose width and height are both set 
76. D Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    4 Object Reference    A wide variety of objects are available in a graphics plate  We recommend that you read this section to get an  overview of the kinds of things you can do with a graphics plate  It s a great place to get ideas when you want to  design a new graphics plate     Graphics plate objects are the building blocks that are used to construct custom control screens  They are selected  from the graphics plate Toolbox  shown below in Figure 4 1   This section will describe each graphics plate object  in the order they are listed in the Toolbox menu        Fig  4 1 The Graphics Plate Toolbox    4 1 Graphic Display Module  GDM    A GDM is a mini control panel for an IQ component  It is preconfigured with a variety of different controls that let you  monitor and or control an IQ component  Several standard GDMs are provided with Turbo so the user can  quickly control one or more IQ components from a graphics plate  In addition  custom GDMs can be created to  replace the standard ones or for those IQ components that have no GDM     To place a GDM on a graphics plate  choose Graphic Display from the Toolbox  The GDM Select Compo   nent window  Figure 4 2  will then open to allow you to select the type of GDM to use     Page 71    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software       Fig  4 2 GDM Select Component Window    Component List  Choose the IQ component from this list whose GDM you want to place on the graphics  
77. DM Object    3 Set the attributes of the object and click      the OK button  As mentioned in the note in Step 2 there are  only two items to select  the IQ component and whether or not to include a legend  Figure 3 12 shows  the GDM both with and without the legend  You can always change the attributes later by right clicking      on the object to reopen its Attributes window   And in this case  the Select Component Attributes  window of this GDM also let s you set the color attributes after the GDM object has been created      4 Place the object by clicking on an unused area of the graphics plate  Notice in Figure 3 11 that the  pointer changes to a question mark with an outline of the object  The outline helps you see how much  space the object will occupy on the graphics plate so you will be able to place it     Fig  3 11 The Pointer Changes to Aid Placement of the New Object    Most objects are not allowed to overlap each other  Exceptions include the container objects which  can hold other objects  The GDM object must be placed on either an empty portion of the graphics  plate or on top of an empty portion of a container object     Figure 3 12 shows what this GDM object looks like after it has been placed with the Include Legend  attribute turned on and off     Page 54    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown       Fig  3 12 A GDM With a Legend  Left  and Without a Legend  Right     5 Lastly  adjust the size and location of the object  This will be discusse
78. GE    wit        Fig  6 8 Manual Mixer Control with Custom Controls on a Graphics Plate     gt P mm i         ct EEE    Page 140    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    6 4 Automated Controls   The real power of the IQ mixers with sensing capability  SMX 6s and AMB 5s  is their ability  once configured  to  run automatically  The automatic functions are configured from a series of Sub block screens  Note  Because the  MPX 6 has no level sensors  it has no automatic functions and therefore no sub blocks  To switch to the first Sub   block screen  select the ASA control in the control block of the desired mixer and press either pete   Or g     The above illustration shows only the first SMX 6 Sub block screen  There are four SMX 6 Sub block screens       Fig  6 9 The First SMX 6 Sub block Screen    and five AMB 5 Sub block screens  Use rst    7  to move from one Sub block screen to the next  And use fe       to move from the first sub block screen to the last  We shall use SMX 6 Sub block screens for most of the  illustrations in this section  Bear in mind  however  that only Channel 1 of AMB 5 mixers is capable of automatic  control so there are no controls for Channel 2 in the AMB 5 sub blocks  Figure 6 10 depicts this difference   it is  the AMB 5 version of Figure 6 9     ch waa  TF       Fig  6 10 The First AMB 5 Sub block Screen    Page 141    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    There are a few general items on the first Sub block scre
79. Or   an input signal above the Input Compressor Limiter function Threshold will cause compression to begin     Toggle To switch from one state to another with the same keystroke or mouse action  For example  the    Space  Bar    is used often to toggle various controls on and off in the control block and sub blocks     Toolbox A palette from which the various graphic objects are selected when creating a graphics plate     Trigger A control which is used to cause specific actions or events to automatically take place when system  settings are engaged  For example  the trigger control in the graphics control block determines if Turbo will  automatically load and display a graphics plate when the dataframe file is opened and engaged     TSR A Terminate and Stay Resident program such as a screen saver or antivirus program  Such programs  should not be run at the same time as Turbo because most of them are incompatible with it     Typeface Acharacter or symbol set of a unique design  Typefaces come in different styles  sizes and weights   called fonts      Upload To transfer the settings from the IQ components in a system to the host computer     UART The Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter  It is a chip that serves as a serial communication  interface in most PC computers  16550 compatible UARTs are required for use with Turbo     UCODE A universal code protocol that allows Crown IQ components and third party IQ components to  communicate with an  Q System and be controll
80. Override control does not allow the Max Gain settings to be changed  This means the automatic functions in the  sub blocks can immediately restore or change the input level after it was manually adjusted  For this reason  the  Control Block Override control is seldom used by itself     The main use of the Control Block Override control is to enable a drone to control the input level of a sensing IQ  mixer  SMX 6 and AMB 5  when its ASA control is turned on  The Max Gain To Track Control Block control is also  required for this   See Section 8 for more information about drones            Before proceeding to the descriptions of each function please note the following  The word    algo    is used on  several mixer Sub block screens in the Turbo program  Originally  algo was defined as a smaller  yet self   contained  portion of the larger algorithm that defined the total operation of a sensing IQ mixer  Sounds like  a mouthful  That   s why this manual will substitute the word function for the word algo in most places  That   s  really all an algo is  a function           Page 142    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    6 4 1 Gate Function    Figure 6 9     Gating    is one of the most important functions  It shuts off inputs that are notin use  Gating is often used  to prevent feedback  If several mics in a system are on at the same time  the system   s gain could become so high  that it rings with transients  or breaks into feedback     Lowering the overall g
81. System Button to close a mini plate  see Section 4 13 for a description of mini  plates   When this function is selected  neither the Name or Plate   attributes are active  This is because the  System Button must be placed onto the Mini Plate Container of the mini plate it is intended to close  When this is  done  the System Button will automatically link to that mini plate     Page 94    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    IQ Comm Port  Causes the System Button to control serial communication between the host computer and the  IQ interface  The System Button acts like a toggle switch when this function is selected  Pressing the button once  will turn off the computer s serial port  Pressing it again will turn the serial port back on  This function is useful  when you need to prevent changes from being sent to the  Q System  rj   is a keyboard shortcut which  can also be used to toggle the serial port on and off from a graphics plate     Name  When the Load Dataframe function is selected  the Name attribute is the dataframe file name  You do not  need to include the DIQ extension  for example  you can enter SETUP rather than SETUP DIQ   The dataframe  file must be located in the same directory as Turbo  If itis not  Turbo will not be able to locate it and will display the  message shown below in Figure 4 32 when the System Button is pressed     kotai rase does aot exist        Fig  4 32 Dataframe Files Must Be Stored in the Turbo Directory    When the Open M
82. This can help the operator make smooth rather than abrupt adjustments     Handle to Cursor  Causes the handle to snap to the cursor whenever 7  is pressed at the same time that  the mouse is clicked or dragged         on the travel line of the Pot handle  This provides a way to change the  level ina single quick jump  Although this feature overrides the Cursor to Handle feature  it doesn   t cause a conflict  because the Handle to Cursor feature requires the p1  key     Refresh  This attribute only affects Pots that are linked to  Q2 components  If Refresh is turned on and the Pot  has been placed inside a container object  every time the state of the Pot changes  all objects in the parent  container will retrieve their state from their respective IQ components and redisplay themselves if necessary     Poll  This attribute only affects Pots that are linked to  Q2 components  When this attribute is turned on  the  Q2  component will be polled continually for the current level and the Pot will be updated immediately upon any  changes  When the Poll attribute is turned off  the default   the Pot is only updated when itis redrawn  This feature  is very useful when one of the compressor features of an  Q2 PI P  such as an  Q   P  P SMT  IQ PI P DP IQ   PI P DSP  is used  By polling the  Q2 component  those changes can be immediately recognized by Turbo and  the Pot object updated accordingly     Four Pots are shown in Figure 4 4  Two of the Pots are vertical and two are horizontal
83. X image also have no more than 256 colors  It sometimes works  best if the image has an internal palette with fewer colors  For example  use a 16 color PCX with a 256 color  graphics plate  This sometimes gives Turbo a better chance of matching the colors correctly in your image     If you decide to use a PCX image  you must keep a copy of the PCX file in the same directory as Turbo  The PCX  file is only linked to    not embedded into the container  Whenever the GDM Container is displayed  Turbo    searches for the PCX file so it can read it and display it in the container  If you ever decide to distribute copies of  your custom GDM to others  you will need to include copies of all PCX files that are used     Border  Determines whether or not the border of the GDM Container will be visible when a PCX picture is  displayed in the container  This attribute does not affect the container when no PCX picture is used  Note  To use  the border  the Scale setting must also be turned on     Scale  Determines whether or not a PCX image will be scaled to fit the size of the GDM Container  Caution   If the Scale attribute is turned on and the aspect ratio  ratio of the width to height  of the container is different from  that of the PCX image  the image will be distorted to fit the container  If you want to make the container size fit the size  of the image  start with the container sized bigger than the image and the Scale attribute turned off  Then link the  image and after it is disp
84. X input     Note  If desired  analog inputs can be used as simplex AUX inputs  This is controlled by the    Use Analog as Aux     command in the AUX Input Commands Sub block screen  See Section 8 5 2 for more details     The Analog Input Commands Sub block screen is located between the AUX Input Commands Sub block screen  and Binary Input Commands Sub block screen  It is used to assign commands to any of the 16 analog inputs     To assign one or more commands to an analog input  first use gre    37  to advance to the command Sub block  screen titled    Analog Input Commands     Then select the Add button  The window in Figure 8 9 will appear     Only one command can be assigned to an input at a time with the command window but you can assign as many  commands as you want to an input by repeating the steps described next and assigning additional commands to  the same input        Fig  8 9 Adding a Command Assignment to an Analog Input    Input    The drone analog input number     Components  The Components list is used to select the IQ component that will be controlled by the drone  input  All a component needs to be included in the list is a control block   it does not have to be on line to appear  in the list  By including off line components itis possible to preconfigure a drone before it is connected to an actual  IQ System     Available Functions  The Available Functions list is used to select the command that will be sent to the  selected IQ component when the drone inpu
85. You can also send a new level by selecting  Send New Level  Aline will appear below the Send New Level command to prompt you for a desired level  Press  p   to move to it and enter the new level     When Unparalyzed  You can determine what actions  will be taken when an input is first unparalyzed  The  choices vary depending upon the type of input selected  AUX or Analog      AUX Input  You can prevent any commands from being sent by selecting Send No Settings or you can force the  current settings to be sent by selecting Send Current Settings  This latter choice will cause the    on    settings to be  sent if the input happens to be    on    and the    off    settings to be sent if it happens to be    off     You can also force the     on    or    off    settings to be sent regardless of the on off state of the input by selecting Send On Settings or Send Off  Settings     Analog Input  You can prevent any levels from being changed by selecting Send No Levels or you can force the  current level settings to be sent by selecting Send Current Levels  You can also send a new level by selecting  Send New Level  Aline will appear below the Send New Level command to prompt you for a desired level  Press  p   to move to it and enter the new level     Page 187    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    8 6 Linking Multiple Drones   Sometimes an  Q System requires more than one drone  A special    transponder    mode makes this possible by  allowing multiple drones to b
86. a bar graph rather than a numerical readout     The standard GDMs do not have to be used  You can create and save custom GDMs for amplifiers  Refer to  Section 3 9 for more information about creating a custom GDM     Page 120    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    5 3 Manual Controls  All IQ PI P s have manual controls which can be used to make real time adjustments to one or more amplifiers   They can be accessed both from a control block and a graphics plate     5 3 1 Manual Control from a Control Block  Most of the manual controls are located in the amplifier control blocks  A sample is shown below in Figure 5 8     APIF  Py  Hehe l JH iii  E lasi  F          Foes  P pe  DaPLP 0P  H    ay  ay  f   Hi  L   ay  f   ar  ay  ay       Fig  5 8 An Amplifier Control Block Screen    All of the manual controls will be described next  However  not all controls are available for all IQ P  Ps  Refer to  the control blocks in Figure 5 2 to see which controls are available for the different models     DSPI  The Data Signal Presence Indicator is an LED that flashes whenever the IQ PIP is polled  The DSPI  control is used to force the indicator to stay on as an aid to the troubleshooting of communication on the Crown Bus   Once the DSPI control is turned on  the DPS  will remain lit continuously even if the control block for another device  is selected  Turning off the DSPI control restores the indicator to its normal function of blinking when a valid IQ  command is rece
87. a test and the ending frequency of the returning data     View Curve  Serves as both a parameter and a control  As a parameter it sets the contents the Curve  screen  by pressing the    Space Bar      As a control is changes the display to the Curve screen  by pressing  fe      The possible settings are     Impedance  Display only the impedance response from the most recent test on the Curve screen     Frequency  Display only the frequency magnitude response from the most recent test on the Curve  screen     Imped Ref  Display only the reference impedance response on the Curve screen   Freq Ref  Display only the reference frequency magnitude response on the Curve screen     Imped w Ref  Display both the impedance response from the most recent test and the reference  impedance response on the Curve screen     Freq w Ref  Display both the frequency magnitude response from the most recent test and the reference  frequency magnitude response on the Curve screen     Page 200    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    11 4 Manual Controls  A few SLM 8 functions can be manually controlled from the control block and setup sub block  Please refer to  Figures 11 1 and 11 2     All Start   Available from both the control block and setup sub block   Pressing  2 causes all SLM 8s to  immediately initiate a test     All Abort   Available from both the control block and setup sub block   Pressing f   causes all SLM 8s to  immediately stop all tests in progress     DSPI  The Da
88. ace Bar   or peer   again  Once  selected  the amplifier model and appropriate scale factors will be saved in the firmware of the  Q2 PI P     aaa G    aaa P       Fig  5 4 Amplifier Model List    Custom scale factors can also be entered using the User Defined selection  Contact Crown s Technical Support  Group for additional information if you need to use this feature     Location  amp  Purpose  These two text lines are available for you to include relevant notes about the unit  You  can enter anything here up to 19 characters per line  upper case only  for legacy IQ PI P s and up to 12  characters per line  upper and lower case  for  Q2 PI Ps     Page 117    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    5 2 Monitoring an Amplifier  We will skip over the controls for now and focus on the monitor area of the amplifier control block  Several ways  are provided to monitor an amplifier     5 2 1 Monitoring from a Control Block   The most basic monitor capability is provided in the monitor area of each amplifier control block  Using control  blocks you can monitor up to four amplifiers at a time because each Control Block screen displays four of them   Here are the items you can monitor     In  A numeric readout of the relative input signal level of each amplifier channel  It is sensed at the balanced gain  stage of the amplifier  The indicator can report a range from 0 to  50 dB  Legacy IQ P  Ps  A reading of 0 dB  equals approximately  16 dBu   Q2 PI Ps  A reading of 
89. ain is one way to fix this problem  but some mic levels might become too low  Gating is a  better solution  A microphone is    live    only when a sound is loud enough to open its gate  for example  speaking   singing  etc       Max Gain  The Max Gain control sets the maximum gain for an input  The gain can not rise higher  even when  the Auto level function is active  The Max Gain control also sets the    gate open    gain when only the Gate function  is in use     When ASA is on  the Max Gain settings in the sub block override the corresponding control block gain settings   They work like the control block gain settings when most of the automatic functions are off  When ASA is off  the  control block gain settings take over     The Max Gain control has its own    emergency mute    feature  Pressing the    Space Bae    when a Max Gain control  is selected immediately mutes the gain  sets it to    100 dB   This feature is a toggle  If the control is still selected  press  the    Space Bar    again to toggle back to the previous setting  The previous level setting is lost if the cursor is moved  to another control     Tip  The final gain settings are usually made by listening  If you set the gain too high  the system could break  into feedback  It is possible to attenuate all channels at once using the secondary mix capability of the control  blocks  First  set the control block levels far below the feedback point  Now ASA can be used to activate the  control block mix which w
90. anced IQ System Software crown    Contents                           1 1 System Requirements         c ccsccsescssessssesessessssesssssssssessessssssecsusscsasersassnsasesassueensaesessesussesnseeseees  1 2 About This Manual            c cceccessessessessessessesseescssecsessessessesussucseesansaesessuseusentsnteassessesensensenteneneeees  1 3 Technical Support  k4  Installation      scs 0 de ainive teen dee daweinaneiie dana A E  1 5 For Experienced Users  16 gt  Whats Newin Version IAs iiei casted bac S 15  2  USING  TUIDO EEATT E  2 41  Basic Concepts sive nnna hana ERER dnastaiin seventies  21 1 TOXU SCIBONS settee  teats aids eva eines ere ane a ete  24 2  Graphics Plates s 2 ts  oes eattn caienacaith aot asics a a eaten i  2 1 3 Perspective  2 2 Starting the Program  2 2 1 Optional Command Line Parameters          cccccsssecsssssssssesssssssssssssssssesnsssensassnsasensasanees  2 3 Establishing Communication           c cccssceeeees  2 4 Setting Turbo   s System Parameters                 2 5 Using Control Blocks         ccseeesseessesesneees  2 5 1 The Parts of a Control Block  2 5 2 Navigating Control Blocks  amp  Setting Controls    Moving from One Control Block to Another  e Adding a New Control Block        c cccssssssssssssssssssssssssssnssssesassnsassrsssssssessesnsseensessesess  e Selecting a Control or Text Line          cscssessssssssssssssssssessssssessssnssssnssessssessssnssssessneneees  e Setting an On Off Control    Setting a Level  Control scccccissccciec
91. and  OC status  The ODEP level is displayed as a percent and IOC shows    Ok    when distortion is less than  0 05  and    IOC    when it is higher than 0 05      Input  amp  Output Levels  Unlike the numeric readouts of the control blocks  the amplifier Display screens  provide a bar graph representation of the input and output signal levels     Power Status  Asmall green indicator next to the channel number shows that amplifier   s high voltage supplies  are turned on  The channel   s high voltage supply is off when the indicator is not present     Loop  amp  Address  The Crown Bus loop number and IQ address of each amplifier are displayed at the bottom     Page 119    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    crown     5 2 3 Monitoring from a Graphics Plate  The most graphical way to monitor an amplifier  and the way that offers the most control  is from a graphics plate   The maximum number of amplifiers that can be monitored is limited only by the design of the graphics plate and    speed of the system     Several generic amplifier GDMs  Graphic Display Modules  are shown in Figure 5 7 below     hahha        0000  ooogo  4 1000  0o00  a  1000  ooogd  g ooco  goood  j  1000  ooogd    3 1000  goood  g  0000   ooogo    g oo0o  ooogo  g  1000   ooogo    1Q2 PILP s    Fig  5 7 Monitoring Amplifiers with Graphics Plate GDMs    The GDMs contain many of the same features as an amplifier Display screen plus several controls  Notice that  ODEP is represented at the top with 
92. and  troubleshooting feature     Spin Control Agraphic object that is often used to control multistate parameters that cannot be controlled by  a Pot or Button object  such as the Delay Time parameter of an SMX 6 Gate function   It has a text numerical  readout and an increment and decrement button to make selections     Page 211    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    String Object A graphics plate object that is used to control functions in UCODE compatible IQ components  whose state is a text string     Sub block A set of parameters that operate the automatic functions or that otherwise configure an IQ compo   nent  For example  the automatic mixing capability of an IQ sensing mixer is controlled from a sub block  See ASA  also     T Board Abackplane circuit board that connects external system wiring and power to the edge connector of an  IQ matrixer or drone  Together  the T board and its mating IQ component circuit board form the shape of a    T     T   boards are designed to be removed for easy bench top wiring     Text  Object  A graphic object that serves as a text label on a graphics plate  Text objects can be placed on  top of other objects like buttons and containers to label them  A wide variety of typefaces and fonts are available     Threshold A control that determines when something will begin to happen  Threshold controls are used in  many functions  For example  an input signal above the Gate function Threshold will cause the gate to open  
93. ar  Because the MPX 6 is only manually controlled  it has no ASA control  The SMX   6 has a Lock control which enables you to    lock    Channel 1 and 2 together  The AMB 5 has no level control on  Input 6  Channel 2 because this input is reserved as an ambient sensing input for automatic level control     6 1 Initializing a Mixer Control Block   The first step in initializing an amplifier control block is to set the IQ address and Crown Bus loop number  This is  normally done automatically during a roll call  However  you can set them manually if you need to configure a  system off line     IQ Address  amp  Crown Bus Loop  The IQ address number you enter must match the physical IQ address  switch setting on the IQ mixer  The Crown Bus loop number must match the physical loop to which the IQ mixer  is wired     On Line  The phrase    On Line    will appear in the upper right corner of the information area when an IQ mixer  is actively connected to and in communication with the IQ System     Page 133    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Model  Location  amp  Purpose  These three text lines are available for you to include relevant notes about  the unit  On the model line you can enter any text up to 13 characters  On the location and purpose lines you can  enter any text up to 19 characters  Only uppercase characters are allowed     6 2 Monitoring a Mixer  Two of the mixers  the SMX 6 and AMB 5  have sensors on the their inputs and outputs which allow you
94. ar Meter you create takes some  processing time from the host computer  This means that the more Bar Meters you create  the slower their  response  To place a Bar Meter on a graphics plate  choose Bar Meter from the Toolbox  The Bar Meter  Attributes window  Figure 4 9  will then open so you can configure it  Its attributes are described next     Component List  Selects the IQ component to which the Bar Meter will be linked  All IQ components that    ag Multiples 2  eg Multiples 2  ag Bultipler 4    ox ael  26    Ale Lael Fae        Show Lepea   E  Feke   E  Forder       Fig  4 9 Bar Meter Attributes Window    appear in the control blocks and all  Q2 components whose UCODE  OIF file  is visible to Turbo will appear in this  list     Function List  Selects the specific function that the Bar Meter will monitor  The function list will change to match  the IQ component selected in the component list     Channel  Selects the channel which the Bar Meter will monitor  This attribute will not be available for some IQ  components and some functions     Input  Selects the input which the Bar Meter will monitor  This attribute will not be available for some IQ  components and some functions     Max Level  Sets the maximum level for the Bar Meter  In this way  you can limit the display range of the object  to tailor the meter to the type of signal it will monitor     Min Level  Sets the minimum level for the Bar Meter  In this way  you can limit the monitor range of the meter  to tailor 
95. are a total  of eighteen  Some objects pertain to specific IQ components while others do not  Each one is described in detail  in the Object Reference section  Section 4  later in this manual     To open the Toolbox menu press f   or double click     on the Crown IQ icon  You must use either the OK button  or Cancel button to close it        Fig  3 9 The Graphics Plate Toolbox    Earlier we briefly discussed GDMs or Graphic Display Modules  They are preconfigured mini control panels  which are available for many IQ products  In Figure 3 1 we saw the GDM for an amplifier with an IQ PI P MEM   This time let s use a GDM from an amplifier with a legacy IQ P  P  as an example and learn how to select a new  object from the Toolbox and set its attributes  Here are the steps     1 Open the Toolbox menu by pressing fF     2 Select the desired object from the Toolbox and click      on the OK button  In this example  select the  first object  Graphics Display  this is the GDM entry   A Select Component window will open as shown  in Figure 3 10  Note  Normally an Attributes window will open here to enable you to set the various  attributes of the object  But the GDM objects are  for the most part  preconfigured so only two things  are required  1  selecting the component which will be represented by the GDM  and 2  determining  whether or not the GDM will include a legend     Page 53    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software       Fig  3 10 The Select Component Window for a G
96. ase    On Line    will appear in the upper right comer of the information area when an SLM 8  is actively connected to and in communication with the  Q System     Model  Location  amp  Purpose  These three text lines are available for you to include relevant notes about  the unit  Up to 15 characters can be entered on each line     Page 195    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    11 2 Monitoring an SLM 8  There are several ways to monitor a load or a system output with an SLM 8  This section will explore each one     11 2 1 Monitoring from a Control Block   Once an SLM 8 has been configured  the pass  P  or fail  F  status of each of its eight channels can be measured  in the right half of each control block  see Figure 11 1   Notice that each channel is independently monitored for  impedance and frequency  The P F indicators in the control block function identically to the Pass Fail LEDs on the  front panel of the SLM 8     11 2 2 Monitoring from a Curve Screen   It is also possible to view the response from the SLM 8 Curve screen  To do so  switch to the SLM 8 Setup Sub   block screen by pressing   4  or selecting the Setup command in the center of the control block and pressing the     Space BAr    or Left clicking the mouse      The Setup Sub block screen shown in Figure 11 2 will appear     IFLA B  i LOOP j       Fig  11 2 The SLM 8 Setup Sub block Screen    Next  select the desired channel under the View Curve column in the lower right portion of the 
97. at acts like a level control or potentiometer  For example  it can be used to control the input  attenuator of a Crown amplifier equipped with an IQ PIP or the gain control of an SMX 6     Power An IQ PI P control that turns on and off the high voltage power supply of each channel     Page 210    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Q Anumber that describes the damping or  conversely  the resonance of a system  It is often used to describe the  ratio of a filter s center frequency to its bandwidth     Ratio The Ratio or Compression Ratio parameters are used in both the Input Compressor Limiter and Output  Compressor Limiter functions  They set the amount of compression that will be applied for every step over the  Threshold  For example  a ratio of 4 1 will cause 15 dB of compression to be applied to a signal that is 20 dB over  the Threshold  An infinite compression Ratio  co  1  will cause the function to behave like a limiter  See Compres   sor  Limiter and Threshold also     Reaction Time AnAuto Level function parameter that determines how quickly the gain will be adjusted so the  average signal level matches the Threshold setting     Release Time An Input Compressor Limiter parameter that sets the amount of time it takes for the gain to  return to normal when the input level drops below the Threshold setting     Roll Call The IQ program performs a roll call to establish communication with all IQ components in an  Q  System and to upload all system settin
98. ate Tast hoda  2  keben   adeo Meme  Dia Dph   E  Aies Fact Panin O Alir Chean Shen Active  Aecerve Shute Kepe O atta O ME O cents  O Pr  e O   ii  Airiga  O AhEnter    bic Shai Ken   Fress F1 for Help on Fronty                                Fig  A 1 The PIF Editor s Main Window  Top  and Advanced Window  Bottom     Page 213    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Note  The example in Figure A 1 assumes that the Turbo was installed to a subdirectory named Turbo14 on  hard drive C  Please consult your Windows documentation on running and using the PIF Editor     Turbo may not run reliably in the background so the Background Execution box in the main window of the PIF  Editor should not be checked  Checking the Exclusive Execution box may improve performance by a small  amount     In the advanced window of the PIF Editor  change the Background Priority to 100  the Foreground Priority to 200  and make sure the Detect Idle Time box is checked  None of the items in the Memory Options section should be  checked  In the Display Options section  do not check any of the Monitor Port boxes but do check the Emulate Text  Mode and Retain Video Memory boxes     IMPORTANT  If you switch back to Windows while the Turbo is running  some communication from the  Q  System may be lost  For this reason  we do not recommend that you attempt to switch the focus from Turbo to  Windows or other programs during periods of critical operation for the IQ System     If you must regula
99. ating a new GDM Container  It is used later after the custom GDM has been  completed and is linked to an IQ component  Right clicking      on a custom GDM  reopens the GDM Container  Attributes window and allows you to edit the Loop attribute     Address  Sets the IQ address number for the IQ component that is linked to the custom GDM  This attribute  should be ignored when creating a new GDM Container  It is used later after the custom GDM has been  completed and is linked to an IQ component  Right clicking      on a custom GDM  reopens the GDM Container  Attributes window and allows you to edit the Address attribute     Background  Sets the background color of the GDM Container     PCX File name  Sets the file name of an image that will be displayed in the background of the GDM  Container  The ability to display an image in the background of the GDM Container is a very useful feature  It can  display your company logo  It can have a picture of a control panel that you complete by adding objects  see  Section 3 9 4      Only PCX bitmap files are supported and you will have to use a third party paint or graphics program to create    Page 97    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    the PCX file  If you use this feature  we recommend that the image have a color depth no higher than the one you  are using for the graphics plate  see also Section 3 2   For example  if your graphics plate is set to use 256 colors   we recommend that the internal palette of the PC
100. attenuation level of each input and channel  SMX 6 Mixer  includes all MPX 6 commands plus    ASA   tur on off all automation functions  Max Gain Tracks Control Block   makes Max Gain of each input equal to the control block gain settings  Control Block Override   this control is reserved for future use  Max Gain   set the maximum gain for an input and channel  Low Set   set the    closed gate    gain for an input and channel  Gate Algo   turn on off the Gate function  Gate Threshold   set the point when an input gate    opens     Duck Priority   turn on offthe Duck Priority function  Input Compression   tur on off the Input Compressor Limiter function  Input Compression Threshold   set the point when input compression begins  Auto Level   tum on off the Auto Level function  Auto Level DAOL   set the Desired Average Output Level of each input and channel  Idle Gain   set the initial level for the Auto Level function when a gate    opens     Output Compression   turn on off the Output Compressor Limiter function  Output Compression Threshold   set the point when compression begins  Output Limiter   select which inputs and channels are compressed  Gate Count Master   tum on off the Gate Count function  Gate Count   tum on off gate counting for each input  Lock  Attenuation    locks output Channel 1 and 2 so that attenuation changes to one also affect the other  Lock  Max Gain    locks output Channel 1 and 2 so that changes to the Max Gain setting of one also affect the  other  
101. be set from 1 to 100  in 1  steps     Amount  The ODEP Conservation function reduces gain by adding input attenuation  The Amount control  determines the amount of attenuation  in dB  to add for every 1  that the ODEP level rises above the Trigger  Level  For example  if Amount is set to 0 5 dB  0 5 dB of attenuation is added when the ODEP level rises 1   above the Trigger Level  5 dB of attenuation is added when the ODEP level rises 10  above the Trigger Level   etc  Attenuation levels of  0 25   0 5   1 0   2 0   3 0   4 0 and    5 0 dB can be inserted     Release Time  While ODEP Conservation responds almost instantly when ODEP levels rise above the  Trigger Level  response to falling levels is controlled by the Release Time control  Release Time sets the length  of time  in seconds  that ODEP Conservation delays before beginning to restore amplifier gain  Release Time can  be set to 0 2  0 4  0 6  0 8  1  1 5  2  3  4  6  8  10  12  15  20 or 30 seconds     5 4 2 Smooth Output Limiter  The Smooth Output Limiter slowly reduces the gain of the amplifier to keep the average of the peak output level  below a predetermined output level     Smooth Output Limiter  Turns on off this feature     Threshold  Sets the point at which the limiter begins to affect amplifier gain  The Threshold is the output level   in dB  above which input attenuation is added to reduce gain  0 dB equals the full rated output of the amplifier  when driving an 8 ohm load  For example  setting the Thresho
102. bjects          cccccsssssseessesssecssssessssessssesnesnssesussnesssneseeseneens 11  Sample Text Screen and Graphics Plate           ccccccssssecscesssesssesseescsesssssssesssesssesseanssesnsansnssnsensneansansnssneanenseees 17  The Main Control Panel Screen   An Amplifier Control Block Screen vseen A ER A 18  A 6 Bar Amplifier Display Screen           ccccssessessssssseesssessesccsessesscsesseescsessessesecsesceuesueeseueeueecaueaueeseusaneasaneaneeseneas 19  An Amplifier Sub block Screen          cesssssssesessessesesseescsessesscsessesesesseesescssesesseseesesecueeceuseusacaueaneacausaneesaneaneesaneas 19  A Sample Graphics Plate            cccccccsssssssssesseecssesseescsessesscsessessesesseesesesssesesesseeseuecuceceuseueeceusaneesausaneasaneaneesanees 20  Putting Text Screens and Graphics Plates into Perspective        c  cccscssecssessescssesescsessescsneseecsneseessnsaeeseneens 21  The Turbo Title Screen   No Interface Found Me SSage ME 23  Looking for Interface Message          s ecseccssessessssesseecssessesscsesseesesessessesecseesesesueeseuesueeseusaueacauseneecausaneesaneaneetaneens 23    A Typical Roll Cal  Control Panel Scre             System AUX Setup Screen        cecccsessesscsessesseseesessssessesscsesseescsesseesssesseesssesseesssesseanssecusansueausansneaneananeaneananeenes 28  The Device Menu   An SMX Control Block Screen          s secsessesssssssssssssssssscsessescssescsecsesscsessesscsesssesesesossscseseesseossessseassueeseuesateneaees 30  An SMX Co
103. board in the computer   s memory  displacing the previous contents of the clipboard   As long as the  clipboard has not changed  the object can be pasted back onto the graphics plate or container by moving the  pointer to an unused portion of the graphics plate or container and pressing  47   Only one object can be  deleted at a time     Important  There is no    Undo    function  This means that deleted objects cannot be restored unless they were  saved as part of the graphics plate prior to deletion  If they were saved  exit the graphics plate by pressing Est   and answering No to the prompt to save changes  This prevents deleted objects from being lost  Then  return to  the graphics plate with the Display control set to Memory and all previously saved objects will be restored     Tip  Save often and make backup copies of your dataframe files so you can return to an earlier version in case  changes need to be undone     3 5 Adding a New IQ Component from a Graphics Plate   It may be necessary to design a graphics plate for an  Q System without actually being connected to the system   Or it may be necessary to design a graphics plate that includes an IQ component that is not yet installed or is not     on line    in the system  Since the missing or    off line    IQ component will not be found during a roll call  you will have  to manually enter it by creating a control block for it  This can be done in the text control block screens   Section  2 5 2 describes how to manuall
104. ciated peripheral equipment  all at one location     2  The Software is owned by Crown and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions  Therefore  you must treat the Soft   ware like any other copyrighted material  such as a book or a musical recording  except that you may either  a  make one copy of the Software solely for  backup or archival purposes  or  b  transfer the Software to a single hard disk  provided you keep the original solely for backup or archival purposes  You may  NOT copy the written materials  the    documentation     accompanying the Software     3  You may NOT distribute copies of the Software to others or electronically transfer the Software from one computer to another over a network  The Software  contains trade secrets and to protect them you may NOT decompile  reverse engineer  disassemble  or otherwise reduce the Software to a human perceivable  form  You may NOT modify  adapt  translate  rent  lease  loan  resell for profit  distribute  network or create derivative works based upon the Software or any part  thereof  You may NOT transfer the Software and accompanying documentation on a permanent basis without first obtaining written authorization from Crown  and without the recipient agreeing to the terms of this Agreement     4  This Agreement is effective until terminated  This Agreement is immediately terminated if you violate the terms and conditions hereof  You agree upon such  termination to destroy the S
105. connected to a drone at one time  However  other factors limit the total  see the preceding note      Note  Although analog inputs can double as simplex logic inputs  see Section 8 5 2   they cannot be used as  binary logic inputs     To assign one or more commands to the binary code of a channel  first use e7   P54  to advance to the command  Sub block screen titled    Binary Input Commands     Then select the Add button  The window in Figure 8 8 will  appear        Fig  8 8 Adding a Command Assignment to a Binary AUX Input    Only one command can be assigned to an input at a time with the command window but you can assign as many  commands as you want to an input by repeating the steps described next and assigning additional commands to  the same input     Begin by entering the Channel letter  A  B  C or D  and Switch number at the top  Remember that binary mode  allows the use of many more switches than there are inputs  The switch number is the same as the binary code  number  representing the sum of the values of all the binary inputs that are turned    on    by the switch     Next  select the IQ component and function  Finally  set the Momentary  Inverted and Level parameters   These  parameters are described in Section 8 5 2      Page 181    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    8 5 4 Analog Input Assignments  The analog inputs enable the drone to respond to level controls  A wide variety of commands can be assigned to  an analog input just like an AU
106. control block is Offset 3  and so on     On Line An IQ component is said to be    on line    when it is in communication with an IQ System  Most IQ  components communicate with the system via the Crown Bus     Open to Idle Gain Setting the Auto Leveler Gate Function of the Auto Level function to the    Open to Idle  Gain    causes the function to set the gain to the Idle Gain setting when the gate first opens     Open to Last Position Setting the Auto Leveler Gate Function of the Auto Level function to the    Open to Last  Position    causes the function to ignore the Idle Gain setting when a gate first opens  Instead  the gain is set to its last  level just before the gate closed     Peak Hold An option of the bar meters and graphic display modules that causes the peak levels displayed by  the level meters to persist long enough  with a thin line  to be easily observed     PIP  A Programmable Input Processor is a module that plugs into the back of a Crown P  P compatible amplifier   Many PI Ps are available to provide a variety of features such as sophisticated error driven compressors   crossover networks  voice over paging  constant directivity horn equalization  digital signal processing   Q  System connection  and much more     Plotter Object A specialized container object that is used to display curves from an SLM 8 on a graphics  plate  See Curve object also     Pol An IQ PIP control that can be used to invert the polarity of the audio signal     Pot Agraphic object th
107. cs plate itself by double clicking       on an unused portion of the graphics plate  Figure 2 24 shows  the graphics plate version of the graphics plate control block     To close the graphics plate control block  click once         anywhere outside of it     one  one  irr    Diak Lock  hiar Hiir   Dire D Rere O Fian  Pre  bakata Cosa       Fig  2 24 The Graphics Plate Version of the Graphics Plate Control Block    The    Data    area on the left side is the same as the information area of the text Control Block screen version  The  Number parameter and text field below it can be edited by clicking on them and entering the new text  However   the rest of the control block is very different     Page 40    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    The Trigger  Control Lock  Graphics Lock and Display controls are not operational in this control block  They are  intended only to indicate the current settings   you must return to the Control Block screen to change them  The  other controls are fully operational and are explained below     Store  Stores the current graphics plate into memory  the volatile memory or RAM of the host computer  where  the rest of the  Q System   s settings are kept during operation  Storing a graphics plate into memory is the first step  in saving it  The second step is to save all the system settings and all graphics plates in memory to the computer s  hard drive in a dataframe file  This is done by pressing      IMPORTANT  If you made cha
108. ct on the Graphics Plate       Page 112    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    4 18 String   The String object is used to control functions in UCODE compatible components whose state is a text string  An  example of this might be naming a preset  To place a String object on a graphics plate  choose String Object  from the Toolbox  The String Attributes window  Figure 4 59  will then open so you can configure it  Its attributes  are described below     Strisg Hot Attributes        Fig  4 59 The String Attributes Window  Component List  Selects the IQ component to which the String object will be linked  Only  Q2 components  will be included in the list if they are entered into a control block     Function List  Selects the specific function that the String object will control  The function list will change to match  the IQ component selected in the component list     Background  Sets the background color of the String object   Text  Sets the foreground color of the text for the String object     Read Only  Causes the String object to display information only  The operator will not be able to change the  value of the string     Border  Determines whether or not the border of the String object will be visible     Refresh  When the Refresh attribute is turned on and the String object has been placed inside a container  object  every time the state of the String object changes  all objects in the parent container will retrieve their state  from the IQ component an
109. cy IQ P  Ps  The range is 5 to 60 seconds   Q2 PI P s  The range is 0 to  255 minutes  zero is a special setting for testing the Gate Level setting      Turn On Delay  IQ P  P   s are equipped with a built in turn on delay whose duration is determined by the IQ  address  Delay   10 ms x IQ address   The higher the address  the longer the delay before the amplifier   s high   voltage supplies are turned on  This delay prevents a large number of amplifiers from tuming on at the same time  and  possibly  tripping the AC circuit breakers  It may not be desirable to use this capability when using Stand By  because the high voltage supplies must be turned on instantly when an input signal above the Gate Level is  detected  Turn off the Tum On Delay control to disable the delay     Tip  Experiment with the delay enabled and disabled  If the system has only a few amplifiers  and each has a  low IQ address  the tum on delay may be short enough to make the use of the Turn On Delay unnecessary     5 4 4 Error Reporting  Another SmartAmp feature is the ability to alert you if a fault occurs  A visual warning in the form of a pop up  message can appear for any condition described in this section     Fault Warning  An amplifier fault condition occurs when a channel fails  The host computer reports this condition when Fault Error  Report is toggled on     Fault   Fault Error Report  Turns on off this feature     Input Drive Level   This parameter is only used with legacy P  P  amplifiers  A
110. d  see Section 4 11      Moveable When Locked  Allows a mini plate to be moved even when the Graphics Security Lock control  on the graphics plate   s control block is turned on  The Graphics Security Lock is normally turned on when a  graphics plate has been completed to prevent an operator from inadvertently altering the appearance of the  graphics plate  see Section 2 8 1   When this is done and the Moveable When Locked attribute of a mini plate is  turned off  the mini plate will remain fixed in the same position it occupied when it was created  saved      Save  Makes the mini plate  including the Mini Plate Container object and all objects placed in it  accessible to all  graphics plates  To permanently save the mini plate  you will need to save it to a dataframe file by exiting the  graphics plate and pressing   9     A Mini Plate Container looks like any other container object as is shown in Figure 4 39 below     Fig  4 39 A Mini Plate Container Object    Mini plates always display on top of other objects and they open in the same position on the graphics plate as when  they were created  saved   This is why the Moveable When Locked attribute can be very valuable   enabling  you to uncover objects underneath a mini plate  Mini plates can also be nested  That is  a System Button to open  one mini plate can be located on another mini plate  In this way  the second mini plate is opened from the first     Editing a mini plate is easy  Open it with a System Button and make 
111. d more fully in the sections which  follow     3 3 2 Resizing an Object   Most graphics plate objects can be resized   Exceptions include the Crown IQ icon and text objects   To resize an  object  position the pointer over the lower right corner of the object with the mouse      as shown in Figure 3 13A   The pointer will change to a cross to let you know when you are over the corner  Then drag the corner of the  object by clicking the left mouse button      and keeping it pressed while you move the mouse  An outline of the  object   s new size will be depicted with a dashed line as shown in Figure 3 13B  Release the mouse button and the  object will be resized as shown in Figure 3 13C     Release       Fig  3 13 Resizing an Object    Note  The legend panel to the left of the GDM is a separate object and must be resized separately     Page 55    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    To restore an object to its default size  the size it had when it was first created  click       on the upper right corner  as shown in Figure 3 14        Fig  3 14 Restoring an Object to Its Default Size    3 3 3 Moving One or More Objects  To move a single object  click      anywhere along its top edge except the top right corner and drag the object to  the desired location  Figure 3 15      With the exception of text and container objects  one object cannot be placed on top of another     Click Drag Release          OoOoog  Ooog    E        Fig  3 15 Moving a Single Object    If
112. d redisplay themselves if necessary     Page 113    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Width  Sets the maximum number of characters which can be entered into the text string     A sample String object is shown below in Figure 4 60  Its width parameter is set to 40      Emer ient hee S  Li    Fig  4 60 A Sample String Object    To enter or edit a text string  click on the text string field with the center mouse button       If you do not have a  three button mouse  you can hold down the left mouse button while clicking the right mouse button       After you  have finished entering or editing the text string  press s5  to exit the field  Press the String object button below the  text string to send the text string command     Page 114    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    5 Monitoring  amp  Controlling Amplifiers    PI P compatible Crown amplifiers can be monitored and controlled by an  Q System after an IQ PI P   Program   mable Input Processor  is installed into the amplifier  There are several models of IQ PI P s available and they can  be generally divided into two categories     legacy    IQ compatible P  Ps and newer  Q2 compatible P  Ps   Although both types are very similar and share many features  the  Q2 PI Ps include support for UCODE  a  universal plug in protocol  While both types of components have similar capabilities  there are some differences in  the controls and control blocks of each IQ P  P  model  Where appropriate t
113. described next      Auto Search All Loops  This control is only relevant if Auto Break Detect is turned on  It forces Turbo to  include all Crown Bus loops in its search for breaks in communication  Ifitis turned off  the auto break detect feature  will only search those loops which have IQ components that are visible on the screen  For example  when a  Control Block screen is displayed  only the loops represented in the visible control blocks will be included in the  auto break detect search if Auto Search All Loops is turned off  The same is true of a graphics plate   only loops  with components that are represented on the graphics plate will be monitored  By turning on the Auto Search All  Loops switch  Turbo will be forced to check all loops   even the ones that are not represented on the screen     Online Search  Enables Turbo to respond to a missing IQ component  one that was previously on line  by  periodically attempting to reestablish communication with it and bring it back on line  After the unit is back on line  its    Page 26    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    current settings will be uploaded and its control block and sub blocks updated  Note  This feature does not enable  Turbo to find new IQ components that do not yet have a control block  To add new components you must either  run a roll call or manually create a control block for each new component     Search Loop    Can be used to locate a break in a particular Crown Bus loop  To use th
114. desired changes  Then right click    on the    Page 101    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Mini Plate Container to open the Mini Plate Attributes window and press the Save button  Finally  save the graphics  plates  including all mini plates  and system settings to a dataframe file  This process requires one extra step if the  mini plate   s System Button is located on a custom GDM  The GDM mustfirst be placed in edit mode  by pressing  its Edit button in the GDM Container Attributes window  before the mini plate can be edited     Note  When a mini plate is saved  it is available to all graphics plates in the system  Mini plates are not exclusive  to just one graphics plate     Mini plates can only be deleted with the Select Mini Plate window  To open the Select Mini Plate window  first open  the System Button Attributes window by right clicking    3  on a System Button  or selecting a System Button from  the Toolbox   Next  choose the Open Mini Plate function so that the Select button is activated  Press the Select  Button and the Select Mini Plate window will open as shown below in Figure 4 40     Select Hiei Flate       Fig  4 40 The Select Mini Plate Window    Finally  select the desired mini plate from the list and press the Delete button  or press p   on the keyboard      Page 102    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    4 14 Line   Line objects are graphics tools for use in designing a logical  attractive graphics plate  They can
115. e File List Window    2 10 Printing the  Q System Settings   All settings of all controls of most IQ components in the system can be printed by pressing f   or p        from any  Control Block screen  The following menu  Figure 2 27  will appear so you can select the type of IQ components  you want to include in the printout      errr  m i  Sem  Ch Fr     elect Capea    iw t  T    i te    4  4  iF  F     Leiples r 7    E 2 felett Tepe lept  he 1 LE   Hegia Frist iry    Wf     k  B 5 i  OFF       Fig  2 27 The Print Select Components Menu    Use gf  gand the    space Bar    to select the component types to include in the printout  Press pte  when you are  ready to begin printing  The printout will be sent to the parallel port  LPT1 or LPT2  that is selected in the Control  Panel screen  see Section 2 4   You can also redirect the printout to a file with the Control Panel screen     The printoutis plain ASCII text which is formatted for 80 columns with appropriate page breaks  Asample is shown  in Figure 2 28     Page 43    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software       04 14 96 IQ MSD TURBO Page 1  10 37 am Dataframe  D  TURBO SAMPLE DIQ   SMX 6  1 Zone  1 DSPI  on Input 1 2 3 4 5 6  Model  SMX 6 Aux  On Chi  20  25  15  20  15  25  Location  AUDITORIUM Sel  On Ch 2  20    25     TS    20   S15  25  Purpose  MAIN MIXER Bus Ch 1  On Ch 2  On ASA  Off    Max Gain Tracks Control Block  off  2 Control Block Override  Off    aan a GATE ALGOS  Zone 1 SMX 1           Input 
116. e from a combination of preconfigured graphic display modules  GDMs   and custom objects is shown in Figure 2 6 below        Fig  2 6 A Sample Graphics Plate    The primary purpose of graphics plates is to provide operators with an attractive graphical interface that makes the  system easy to use and control  Well designed graphics plates can be very intuitive  keeping operator training time  toa minimum  You can create as many graphics plates as your computer   s memory and storage space allow  And  you can create buttons on them that allow the operator to jump from one graphics plate to another  You can even  create graphics plates with instructions to serve as    help    screens for new operators     The graphics plate in Figure 2 6 was created on a PC that provided only standard VGA graphics  This means that  the graphics plate has a resolution of 640x480 pixels  However  if your computer has a compatible SVGA or  XVGA graphics adapter  you can set Turbo to use a higher resolution such as 800x600  SVGA   1024x768   XVGA  or even 1280x1024 pixels  This will give you much more room to create elaborate graphics plates with  many controls  Section 3 later in this manual will describe graphics plates in much greater detail     Page 20    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    2 1 3 Perspective    Mcrown    Figure 2 7 mighthelp put some of the text screens and the graphics plates in perspective  It shows the relationship  between control blocks  sub blocks and graphics
117. e in the Control Block screen  Use per  or  fj to select it and then enter the IQ address and Crown Bus loop  number of the off line IQ component  How do you manually add a control block if no empty ones are visible in the  Control Block screen  First  press p  until you reach the last control block  Then press p  one more time to  create one new control block  You can also press s  t  4rs    to force Turbo to add more than one new control  block        e Selecting a Control or Text Line  Keyboard  Use     4 K  Rl to position the cursor on the desired control or text line  When the line is highlighted   it is selected and ready for input     Mouse  Move the mouse        without clicking or dragging until the cursor is on top of the desired control or text line   When the control or text line is highlighted  it is selected and ready for input     e Setting an On Off Control  Keyboard  Select the desired on off control and press the    Space Bar        Mouse  First select the desired on off control  Then click the left mouse button         e Setting a Level Control   Keyboard  There are two ways to set a level control  You can enter the value directly or you can increment   decrement the value in steps  usually    2 dB steps   Begin by selecting the desired level control  Then you can  enter the value directly by typing the number you want and pressing peter   to engage the new level   Precede  negative numbers with the negative key   Or you can press gs j    to increment or ss
118. e linked together in a single system  Note  This mode requires version 1 1 drones   Contact Crown   s technical support group if more information is needed     To use the transponder mode  you must first enable the Transponder switch in the drone control block  This is  done by modifying the TURBO  INI file which is located in the same directory as Turbo  Open TURBO INI with a  text editor  like the Windows Notepad program  and add the following lines to the end of the file      DroneU   Enabled True       After modifying TURBO INI file  run Turbo and go to the drone Control Block screen  The Transponder switch  should now be visible in the lower portion of the control block as shown below in Figure 8 13     SPER f f f fe f G f f o f fe P fe f  Transponder  Switch    iali EEFI MaE  i  E     1       Fig  8 13 The Drone Control Block with the Transponder Switch Enabled    Next  turn on the Transponder switches of each drone in the system  Finally  perform a roll call and all of the IQ  components attached to the drones will be recognized     In transponder mode  each drone will control a single Crown Bus loop  Each of these Crown Bus loops will use  the IQ address of the drone as its loop number  For example  if an SMX 6 mixer with an IQ address of 7 is  connected to the Crown Bus loop of a drone with IQ address 3  The IQ mixer would be controlled and monitored  as mixer 7 in Loop 3  In transponder mode  all drones appear to be connected to Crown Bus loop 251  In the  preceding
119. e listed as AUX Input   17     Components  The Components list is used to select the IQ component that will be controlled by the drone  input  All a component needs to be included in the list is a control block   it does not have to be on line to appear  in the list  By including off line components itis possible to preconfigure a drone before it is connected to an actual  IQ System     Available Functions  The Available Functions list is used to select the command that will be sent to the  selected IQ component when the drone input is turned on or off   See the Momentary and Inverted parameters  also      Note  It is possible to assign more than one command to the same drone input  In this way  the flip of a single  switch can send a number of different commands to one or more IQ components  Important  Com   mands are executed in the order that they are added to an input  Carefully plan the order  that you want the commands to be executed before adding them to an input or else you may have to delete  and reenter them later        The following commands are available for each IQ component     Amplifier IQ P   P  without SmartAmp features   DSPl   force Data Signal Presence Indicator to stay on  AUX Out   tum on off AUX port output  Power   turn on off the high voltage supply of each channel  Polarity   invert restore the audio signal polarity of each channel  Mute   mute the audio signal by setting the input attenuator to  50 dB    Page 176    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ Sys
120. e parameter is turned on  only the On Level is used   When an input is    on     the level for the associated function will go up or down the number of dB specified by the  On Level  When an input is    off     the level for the associated function will go down the same number of dB     On Off Level   Only available when a level function is selected   The values entered are the levels the  function will use when the input is    on    and    off     respectively     Modify  Use the Modify button to change the selected assignment  Begin by selecting the command assignment  you want to modify  This is done by pressing g  until the input command list is highlighted as shown in Figure 8 7  and using the g  gor left mouse click    5 to select the desired command assignment from the list        Fig  8 7 Selecting an Existing Drone Command Assignment    Next  press the Modify button to summon the command assignment window  Figure 8 6   Make any changes you  want and then press the OK button     Copy  Use the Copy button to duplicate the selected assignment  It can make repetitious command assignments  much easier to enter  The command assignment window will appear so you can make changes before the copied  command assignment is accepted     Delete  Use the Delete button to remove the selected assignment  Begin by selecting the input assignment you  want to delete  Then press the Delete button     Page 179    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    8 5 3 Binary Mode As
121. e some experimentation     4  Set the Expansion Ratio so that the dynamic range of the ambience level does not exceed the available  headroom of the system     5  Set the Attack and Decay Time controls to appropriate speeds     6  Set the Guard Band to the desired offset below the Threshold  if desired   Normally  this can be turned off  by setting it to 0  zero      7  Turn on the AMB function with the Ambience control   Next  the controls are described in the order in which they are listed on the Sub block screen   Ambience  The AMB function is turned on and off with the Ambience control     Attack Time  The Attack Time control determines how rapidly the AMB function will begin to increase the  output level of Channel 1 above the Ambient Offset level  Slower Attack Times cause the AMB function to respond  slower to increases in ambient level and prevent it from responding to sudden increases in level     Decay Time  The Decay Time control determines how rapidly the AMB function will begin to reduce the output  level of Channel 1 while the ambient sense input level is dropping  Slower Decay Times cause the AMB function  to respond slower to decreases in ambient level     Expansion Ratio  The Expansion Ratio control determines how much the gain of output Channel 1 will  increase for every increase in the ambient signal level above the Threshold setting  A4 1 Expansion Ratio setting  will raise the output gain 1 dB for every 4 dB that the ambient signal increases     Most of t
122. e with the IQ interface  However   Turbo has an    auto baud detect    feature and will automatically change the baud rate of the host computer if it fails  to communicate with the IQ interface at the baud rate you selected  In this way  the baud rate control also serves  as a baud rate indicator  showing the baud rate currently being used     The baud rate of the host computer must match the baud rate of the IQ interface  Although some IQ interfaces can  support speeds as high as 38400 baud  some serial cables and some host computers cannot go this fast  The  device with the lowest maximum baud rate will set the maximum possible baud rate for your system  For example   if the serial port of your host computer can only go as high as 9600 baud  you will have to set the IQ interface to    Page 25    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    this slower speed also   Refer to the manual that came with the IQ interface for instructions on setting its baud rate    Note  Turbo   s auto baud detect feature enables it to set the baud rate of the host computer only   not the IQ  interface     Port Active  Turns the serial port on or off  When turned off  Turbo does not communicate with the IQ System   enabling you to change system settings or edit or create new dataframe files without affecting the actual IQ System   You can also toggle the serial port on and off from a graphics plate by pressing   7       Display  Determines the way a control will look when it is turned 
123. ed and or monitored by IQ software     Variable Color A custom color attribute for graphic objects that can be mixed by the user     Page 212    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    S  crown    Appendix A  Using Turbo with Microsoft Windows   Turbo is a DOS based program  In many cases it can also be run fullscreen under Microsoft Windows     however we make no guarantees about this and we do not promise to support Turbo in the Windows environ   ment  This appendix will describe some of the settings which may help you run Turbo under Windows 3 1  3 11    and 95     A 1 Windows 3 1 and 3 11  When running under Windows 3 1 or 3 11 it is best to start Turbo with a PIF  Program Information File   You can  create one with Window s PIF Editor  The memory and other parameters should be configured as shown in the  example in Figure A 1     PIF Editor  Main Window    PIF Editor  Advanced  Window      Ee ee He             Wado te  Oeticnal Parameters   St Bbc    View Hem   Ol Test    Lest Gites   High Grios    boney Aequaemesis  F   fiequind Eiz  FE Decond E    EHS Hemin EE Rewied  i   teus E    HHS Hemy ER Hesir w  m    Daopiy Umage    Full Screen Execute    fackgroend  D Sinimi O Erdur    El Chase window om Eri              Multitasking Dations  Rack qenund Paine  Farogrosred Prini  E  este bile Tins  Casca     boney Opies  C EMS Memmy Leoked C Me Memty Laoked  O   m  High Memory ima O Lock ppisti Hueney    Dipi Opia  Monim Paja  Cret  low Gespiics C High maephiea  E  Emei
124. ee  An Amplifier Sub block Screen for an 1Q2 PIP w teesseesesseseseesecsteseesesssesesneeeeeteeeesissnssesseenesteaneeeeaneeetse 125  An Amplifier DSP Sub block Screen         c cccccscsesseesssesssescseessescseesecscseessesssessessssesssanssesnsansneaneansnssnsananeaneanens   The Control Block of Each IQ Mixer Model a  The  SMX 6 Display  Screen aineen nnn ain   A Single Input from an SMX 6 or AMB 5 Display Screen           csccecccsecsescssesssesssesssenssesueensneaneananeansananeeneenaneens 135  The MPX 6 Display Screen ae  Monitoring a Sensing IQ Mixer with a Graphics Plate GDM 0 0    csesscecseesesstestestesseeseeseessseesneeasenesseesteneeeneans  An SMX 6 Control Block Screen   issie an iain deen einai tannaneaaiey  Turning the SMX 6 Lock Feature On Sets All Gain Controls to 100 dB    ii  Manual Mixer Control with Custom Controls on a Graphics Plate          c cccssssssessescstesnescstestssnsnestsensneseesenes  The First SMX 6 Sub Dlock Sereen        c ceessescessessestecseeseseesseesceseesnsseessenesnssneeseeneessseeeneeaeenssneeseeneeensneeeneees  The First AMB 5 Sub block Screen es  The Second SMX 6 Sub block Sereen      cesesssessessessesstesseseesseesesseessseesseescseeaeeseeseesesatesueesesueeaeseeatesseaeeneases  The Third SMX 6 Sub block Screen       eeeeseecsesessessesstessestesseecesseessseessenesessseeeesseeesneeseesesneeneeneeieeeseneeeneaes  The Fourth SMX 6 Sub block Screen    tes  The External Function  Algos  Window         c scsssessessesssesteseesseece
125. eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeees    10 1 Initializing a PSI Control Block          ccsssssssssssessessssessssssessssssussssessssessesussesessnsessasensaseseesensasesss  10 2 Using a Control Block to Monitor  amp  Control a PS   10 3 Using a Graphics Plate to Monitor  amp  Control a PSI    11 Configuring  amp  Monitoring System  amp  Load Monitors            cccccceessseeeeeeeees 195    11 1 Initializing an SLM 8 Control Block        c ccscscsssssssssssescssesessesessessessssssessssnssesesseesssasensasessesessassnes  11 2 Monitoring  an  SLM 8 oeiia hh veined ind ieee  11 2 1 Monitoring from a Control Block         11 2 2 Monitoring from a Curve Screen     11 2 3 Monitoring from a Graphics Plate        11 2 4 Using a Monitor Speaker                11 3 Configuring an SLM 8   0    tee  11 4 Manual Controls   00 0 0    cece  11 5 Exporting Data from an SLM 8 ou    cc sessesssssssssssssssssssssscsssssssssrssessssssssssssessserseesssssessesessseseees    G    Glossary Of Term raa aaan ar a aaa cas ceseteaezencececereuaccacsexazecs ceteatenespssteaeeeazeses 203    Page 6    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    1 1  2 1  2 2  2 3  24  2 5    27   2 8   2 9   2 10  2 11  2 12  2 13  2 14  2 15  2 16  2 17  2 18  2 19  2 20  2 21  2 22  2 23  2 24  2 25  2 26  2 27  2 28  2 29  2 30  3 1   3 2   3 3   3 4   3 5    3 7   3 8   3 9   3 10  3 11  3 12  3 13  3 14  3 15  3 16  3 17  3 18                Illustrations   A Sample Turbo Graphics Plate Showing Custom O
126. elp window listing many of the points in this section  A sample    T  This treta Allet Ges te tHatrel the Filter  delay  se  dapat oepresoee Fer the 19  PIP  Aree k  s t     Bet Foe teeatrel  te a PRE te Fetare t         Fig  2 20 A Sample Sub block Help Window    Page 36    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    help windows from an amplifier DSP sub block is shown below     2 7 Activating Emergency Mute   During the course of configuring any sound system  mistakes can be made  An input can be turned up too loud   resulting in runaway feedback between one or more microphones and loudspeakers  Although you can use the  IQ System to minimize these problems  it is not immune to    operator error     This is why we added the emergency  mute feature  It allows you to quickly mute many of the IQ components from any Control Block screen  Sub block  screen or graphics plate  To activate this feature  press and hold the    Space Bar    or tap it rapidly five or more times  until the audio is muted  Note  In order to use this feature  it must first be enabled on the Control Panel  Refer  to Section 2 4  The following IQ components will respond to an emergency mute  all mixers  MPX 6  SMX 6   AMB 5  and amplifiers with legacy IQ PI Ps  IQ PI P  IQ PI P AP   Amplifiers with  Q2 PIP  will not respond        When emergency mute has been activated  the following screen in Figure 2 21 will appear     All ETTE    EMERGENCY MUTE    Precos Escape te return of Conmfrol E te reemg
127. en  After describing them  we will describe each automatic  function in the order that they appear in the sub blocks     Max Gain To Track Control Block  Normally  the input gain controls of the control block do not affect the  system while ASA is on   However  changes made to them while ASA is on are stored and executed when ASA  is turned off   It is intended that the Max Gain controls be used to set the level of each input when ASA is on     Turning on the Max Gain To Track Control Block control  located on the top of the first Sub block screen  changes  this operation  It causes any changes that are made to the input gain controls of the control block to be immediately  mirrored by the Max Gain controls in the sub block when ASA is on  It has no affect when ASA is off     Tip  Turn on the Max Gain To Track Control Block then switch back to the control block  Set the maximum level  before feedback for all microphones with the control block input gain controls  The Max Gain settings will be  automatically adjusted to avoid feedback     Control Block Override  As mentioned above  normally the input gain controls of the control block do not  affect the system while ASA is on  Turning on the Control Block Override control at the top of the first Sub block  screen also changes this operation  When turned on  it enables the input gain controls of the control block to  function when ASA is turned on  However  unlike the Max Gain To Track Control Block control  the Control Block  
128. ene edeadanesi sane annA nA aE N E  6 4 4 Gate Function sec chet eeanneanneaee soecieeoenwoncieanwenesin  6 4 2 Duck Priority Function  6 4 3 Input Compressor Limiter FUNCTION          cseccessssesessecessesssssssssssssssssssessssssssssnsssensaeensess  6 4 4  Auto Level FUNCION ivitrucsarauriie sian aaneanian nwoaeennnren wees  6 4 5 Output Compressor Limiter Function      6 4 6 Gate Count Function     6 4 7 External Functions  SMX 6 Mixers Only      csecsesssestssssesseeeees  6 4 8 SMX Interrupts Function  SMX 6 Mixers Only   6 4 9 Mute Function  SMX 6 Mixers Only           cccccecsessesesssescesseseesesesesseessetsessateesssseteess  6 4 10 AMB Function  AMB 5 Mixers Only           c ccsccssessessesssesessesesecsesseseetsatsaesesseseeseess  7 Monitoring  amp  Controlling Equalizers              ccccccccceesseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee  7 4 Initializing an Equalizer Control Block        c ccccsssssssssssessssssssssssssssssssssesnssesussssussssnssesreeesessesesees  7 2 Monitoring an Equalizer  7 3 Manual Controls         cececccecceccsesseseeesesesesseeens        7 3 14 Manual Control from a Control Block  7 3 2 Manual Control from a Graphics Plate       crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    8 Monitoring  amp  Controlling Drones            ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee  8 1 Initializing a Drone Control Block          ccscscssssssessssessssessssessssessssessssessssussssessasersesersesensasensaneaes  6 2  tMonitoring a  Drone ssa
129. er GDM    Level  The level control of each frequency band is located in the upper half of the GDM  They function like     sliders    on a typical equalizer  Simply use the mouse to drag  3  a control up to increase the level or down to  decrease the level at the specified center     DSPI  The DSPI or Data Signal Presence Indicator is an LED on the unit which flashes whenever it unit is polled   The DSPI control is used to force the indicator to stay on as an aid to troubleshooting communication on the Crown  Bus  Once the DSPI control is turned on  the DSPI will remain on continuously even if the control block of another  device is selected  Turning off the DSPI control restores the indicator to its normal function of blinking when a valid  IQ command is received     Mute  Mutes all audio going through the selected channel of the equalizer   Flat  Quickly restores the settings of all equalizer Level controls to 0  zero  dB     Lock  Locks Channel A and B together  Turning on the Lock control causes the changes made to one channel  to also be sent to the other channel     Page 166    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    High Pass  Sets the  3 dB comer frequency of a low pass filter in kHz   Low Pass  Sets the  3 dB corner frequency of a high pass filter in Hz     Memory  Store  Recall  Some equalizers allow you to locally store settings into internal memory inside the  unit  Use the Store and Recall buttons to store the settings into one of the memories  The e
130. er of the GDM Container will be visible when a PCX picture is  displayed in the container  This attribute does not affect the container when no PCX picture is used  Note  To use  the border  the Scale setting must also be turned on     Scale  Determines whether or not a PCX image will be scaled to fit the size of the GDM Container     Caution  If the Scale attribute is turned on and the aspect ratio  ratio of the width to height  of the container is  different from that of the PCX image  the image will be distorted to fit the container  If you want to make the container  size fit the size of the image  start with the container sized bigger than the image and the Scale attribute turned off   Then link the image and after it is displayed  resize the container to fit the image while pressing gst   The jst  key  prevents the image size from changing while the container is resized     Page 65    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Convert  Determines whether or not Turbo will attempt to match  convert  the color palette in the PCX image  with the one it uses     After configuring these attributes  you can press the OK button  Do not press the Save button   it and the Edit button  will be discussed later in Section 3 9 5  After pressing the OK button  a normallooking container will appear   Resize it to a size that is appropriate for your GDM  A sample is shown below with no PCX picture     Objects that are placed into this GDM Container will be automatically li
131. erall operation of Turbo such as serial port and baud rate settings  The main Control Panel screen is shown  below in Figure 2 2 and is described in detail in Section 2 4 later in this manual     Catral Fasel    Serial Pert g    Pile Hae       Fig  2 2 The Main Control Panel Screen    The remaining text screens are related to specific IQ components  They are described in detail in the Sections  devoted to specific IQ components later in this manual  The Control Block screen is the most common text  screen in Turbo  It is the first interactive screen you see when you first run Turbo  Control Block screens contain  individual control blocks  Each IQ component has a single control block and most Control Block screens display  four control blocks at a time as is shown below in the amplifier Control Block screen in Figure 2 3     One Control Block    T 5833 CAPIHET       Fig  2 3 An Amplifier Control Block Screen    Page 18    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Some IQ components also have one or more Display screens  A prominent feature of Display screens is their  bar graph displays of signal levels  Amplifiers have two Display screens  a 6 bar and 8 bar Display screen  The  amplifier Display screens show both the input and output audio signal levels for each input channel of the IQ PIP   Note  Only Crown PI P compatible amplifiers with an IQ PI P  can be controlled or monitored by the IQ System   A 6 bar amplifier Display screen is shown below in Figure 2 4  
132. es much more than just monitor or control an  Q System  It also allows you to design  save  and reuse custom screens  We call these screens graphics plates  shown below  and they give you amazing  power over the operation of your IQ System     A Turbo graphics plate gives you the ability to control what others can and cannot see or do with your IQ System   And you can make them visually exciting and easy to use because you control the layout  size and color of each  object on the graphics plate        Fig  1 1 A Sample Turbo Graphics Plate Showing Custom Objects for  Seven Amplifiers  One SMX 6 Mixer and One MRX 24 Matrixer    Page 11    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    1 1 System Requirements    A 33 MHz Intel   80486 PC compatible computer  recommended  75 MHz Pentium      DOS 5 0 or higher with HIMEM SYS and EMM386 EXE loaded     At least 8 megabytes  MB  of random access memory  RAM  with at least 512 kilobytes  KB  of free conven   tional memory and no less than 3072 KB of free extended memory        A hard disk with at least 5 MB of free space     AVGA 16 color display adapter or better     A mouse or other compatible pointing device  a three button mouse and appropriate DOS driver is recom   mended      A 3  inch floppy disk drive   An RS232  COM  port that uses a 16550 compatible UART   An optional printer  if desired  for producing lists of system settings     1 2 About this Manual   This User Manual is written for the IQ System Administrator  
133. f each step  For example   if the audio input signal stays at a constant level below the DAOL value  the gain would increase it to the DAOL  level over the time  in seconds  specified by the Reaction Time control  In the    real world     audio signals  continually change  and so does Auto Level   s step size  This approach produces a very natural sounding auto  level control     A Reaction Time of 4 seconds is a good starting point for speech  Try 6 10 seconds for music  Although a 4  second Reaction Time might seem slow  remember that the Auto Level function compensates for average  differences in level   such as between soft spoken and boisterous speakers  If a sound source occasionally     blasts     you might also use the Input Compressor Limiter function to control the transients     Tip  The Auto Level function never raises the gain higher than Max Gain  As you set the value of Max Gain  higher  the Auto Level function will have more room to adjust the incoming signal  For inputs with an unusually  wide dynamic range  set Max Gain as high as possible so the Auto Level algo can bring up the quietest passages     Tip  Use a long Reaction Time when the system is used to mute background music during a page  This  provides a pleasing and smooth transition back to background music after the page has been completed     Page 148    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Idle Gain  If the Gate and Auto Level functions are used together  their interaction may prod
134. fails to determine the baud rate     Once communication has been established with the IQ interface  Turbo begins a roll call  During a roll call  Turbo  conducts a poll to identify the Crown Bus loops present and to establish communication with all IQ components  As  the roll call progresses  the screen displays the loops and devices responding to the poll     During the roll call  Turbo also determines the settings of all IQ components and stores them into memory  It then  enters the settings into the appropriate control blocks and  when appropriate  sub blocks  The screen in Figure  2 11 shows the typical results of a successful roll call  Notice that the screen indicates the type of interface that was  found   in this example  an IQ Interface 2  The lower section of the screen includes a tally of the number and type  of devices that responded to the roll call     fell Gall    PSPIP DP F       Fig  2 11 A Typical Roll Call    A roll call can be stopped at any time by pressing 2  or   st   Pressing the    Space Bar    will force the roll call to  advance to the next loop     There are several parameters  system controls  that control both communication with the IQ interface and the way  a roll call works  These parameters are located on the Control Panel screen  discussed next      Page 24    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    2 4 Setting Turbo   s System Parameters   The general system controls of Turbo are located on the Control Panel screen shown in Fig
135. fect  This attribute will not be available for some IQ  components and some functions     Border  Causes the Spin control to use a three dimensional border that gives the Spin control a raised    Page 92    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    appearance  This border is not affected by the color attributes  It is often desirable to turn off the border when the  control is placed inside a container  This causes it to blend into the container     Defer Send  Prevents changes from being sent to the linked IQ component until the Send button is pressed   The Send button is available at the bottom of the control  see Figure 4 30  only when this attribute is turned on     Refresh  This attribute only affects Spin controls that are linked to UCODE compatible IQ components  If  Refresh is turned on and the Spin control has been placed inside a container object  every time the state of the Spin  control changes  all objects in the parent container will retrieve their state from the IQ component and redisplay  themselves if necessary     Numeric  Causes the Spin control to display numerical data  This attribute is automatically selected for some  functions  When the Numeric attribute is turned on  it is also possible to enter a numerical value directly into the  display window when the Spin control is clicked with the center mouse button       Note  Two button mouse users  can simultaneously press both the left and right buttons in place of a center button  Also  the lo
136. file is saved  all the settings in memory are written to the file   including the contents and  attributes of all graphics plates that are also stored in memory  Therefore  saving a graphics plate involves two  steps  1  Store the graphics plate into memory  and 2  Save the contents of memory to a dataframe file     Turbo makes it very easy to store a graphics plate into memory because it will not let you leave the graphics plate  without first offering to store unsaved changes into memory as shown below in Figure 3 30     Selecting Yes will cause the graphics plate to be stored into memory  Selecting No will cause it not to be stored and  all changes that were made since it was last stored will be lost  Selecting Cancel will cause the graphics plate to  remain open     To yom want to store this someent     ice   me  ee        Fig  3 30 A Prompt to Store Changes Into Memory Before Exiting a Graphics Plate    Section 2 8 2 also showed how to manually store a graphics plate into memory at any time by opening the  graphics plate control panel from the graphics plate and clicking on the Store button     After leaving a graphics plate  it is easy to save a dataframe file by pressing   1  and choosing one of the save  options as discussed in Section 2 9  Remember  If you do not save the contents of memory to a dataframe  file  they will be lost when Turbo is shut down or the computer is turned off     Page 69    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Page 70    IQ MS
137. form  Each one is described below     fetes Bittos Attributes  Fumcti       Chamge Flate  D Open Hisi Flate  D   ioam Mismi Flate     l    Comm Fort    Flate t   1   color  A  0 Hidu       Fig  4 31 The System Button Attributes Window    Load Dataframe  Causes the System Button to load and engage the settings in a dataframe file  When this  function is selected  the Name attribute will be activated so you can enter the file name of the dataframe file     Change Plate  Causes the System Button to open a different graphics plate  Using it  you can navigate from  one graphics plate to another without ever returning to the graphics plate Control Block screen  When this  function is selected  the Plate   attribute is activated so you can enter the number assigned to the graphics plate  in its control block     Note  The present graphics plate is automatically saved in memory when using a System Button to switch to  another graphics plate  Therefore  there is no prompt to save changes     Open Mini Plate  Causes the System Button to open a mini plate  see Section 4 13 for a description of mini  plates   Important  The mini plate must already exist  If it doesn   t  you should press the Cancel button and  create the mini plate before creating the System Button for it  When this function is selected  both the Name  attribute and Select button are activated so you can enter or select the name of the mini plate which will be linked  to the System Button    Close Mini Plate  Causes the 
138. formation area when a PSI is  actively connected to and in communication with the IQ System     Model  Location  amp  Purpose  These three text lines are available for you to include relevant notes about  the unit  Up to 15 characters can be entered on each line     Page 193    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    10 2 Using a Control Block to Monitor  amp  Control a PSI  The simplest way to monitor or control a PSI is from its control block  There are only two controls  please refer to  Figure 10 1      DSPI  The Data Signal Presence Indicator is an LED on the side of the PSI  It flashes whenever a data signal   addressed to it  is received  It can be forced to stay on as an aid to troubleshooting by turning the DSPI control on   Turning off the DSPI control restores the indicator to its normal function of blinking when a valid IQ command is  received by the PSI     Aux  Toggles the PSI s AUX port output on and off  The AUX port also has the ability to sense the presence of  an external signal  When a logic    high    is detected at the AUX connector  an asterisk     will appear beside it     10 3 Using a Graphics Plate to Monitor  amp  Control a PSI   A PSI can be monitored and controlled from a graphics but there are no ready made GDMs  graphic display  modules  for a pocket serial interface  This means that you must manually create objects on the graphics plate for  that purpose  Figure 10 2 shows a very simple example     Fig  10 2 Monitoring  amp  Con
139. ge 21    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    2 2 Starting the Program   Before running Turbo  first get a DOS prompt on your computer and then switch to the hard drive and directory  where Turbo is stored  For example  if Turbo is stored in the    turbo    directory  use the change directory  cd   command as follows  cd  turbo     To start Turbo  type  turbo14  After a brief delay  the computer should display the title screen shown below  in Figure 2 8        Fig  2 8 The Turbo Title Screen    Note  Turbo may not be compatible with some terminate and stay resident  TSR  programs  such as screen  savers and antivirus software  We recommend that all TSRs are disabled before running Turbo     2 2 1 Optional Command Line Parameters   Four optional command line parameters  or switches  are available to control the way Turbo initializes  For  example  c    turbo14  d causes Turbo to omit displaying the title screen when it loads  The command  line parameters are listed next     Id Causes Turbo to omit its title screen when it loads     ff file name Instructs Turbo to load and engage the specified dataframe file  For example  type turbo    fnormal   dig torun Turboand engage the dataframe whose file name is    normal    Itis not  necessary to type the DIQ extension  Do NOT type a space between the     f    and the file name     Is Directs Turbo to create a DPMI swap file when it loads  This swap file can enable Turbo to  run when the computer does not have much mem
140. gged          ssesssssesstsesteseeseeseeteeseeeenes 75  47 The Button Attributes WINdOW 0    cesses eeseetesteseetesteseeceseeseecesteneeceseeneeseseeneeseueeneessueeneessussneeseueeneeseusenseseneens 76       48 A Sample  Button noine ERA nc hE SEL AA ARRERA 78  4 9 Bar Meter Attributes WINdOW sfirsit ii caval main aE 79  4 10 Sample Bar Meter Objects            cescecceesseseeseeseessecsessessesseesessucsessneesesueeeesneeseeceseesusenssneeeseueessseeseensaneeneeeeenees 80    4 11 The Legend Automatically Scales to Fit the Bar Meter           c cccsscsessescssessessssesseecesscseecesesneecenesneecsneaneesaneass 80                4 12 The Digital Meter Attributes Window             cccccceecsseeseseeceseseesseeseseceseseessseseeeeceaeeneaseeseeneseaeeneaseeaeeneseaseneaseeaees 81  13     Asample Digital Meter sc E ERRE ARERR RE Sean lee R RGR eee 82  4 14 The LED Attributes Window  0     c scecesseesteseesescessessesnecseesseseesussnssneeessueesnsseessenseeesneesesneeesueesneeseaneeneanseneeasensees 83  4 15 Sample LED Object                   ssssssssssssssssssssesessessesessesnsussesucsuseceucsucscescsscscescseacsessesassesassanseseesassusaesarsnsaesaeas 84  AN6          The TextAttriputes Wind ow s rieten iiin eins eles eaeoe redone 85  417 Sample Fonts   4 18 Sample Font SIZES           cscscsssssssscssssscscsscsecscsscscscsessessssessucsssussussssussusassussesassesassassssassesassassesacsecsesscseceesecseess 86  4 19 Editing the Text in a Text Object oo    cesecseessses
141. gs     RS232 Aserial communication standard supported by most PCs  It uses unbalanced signal wiring and should  not be used for distances over 50 feet  15 2 m      RS422 Aserial communication standard supported by Macintosh computers  It uses balanced signal wiring and  can be used for distances up to 2 000 feet  610 m      Sel A Select control  found in most control blocks  that is used to select one or more IQ components  The GDMs  of selected IQ components are automatically displayed on a graphics plate when the graphics plate Display  control is set to    Selected     This avoids the tedium of manually placing GDMs onto a graphics plate  In the amplifier  control blocks  Sel also selects which amplifiers will be displayed in the Display Screen  See Display Screen also     SLM 8  IQ SLM 8  A system and load monitor with eight channels that can monitor the impedance response  of a load  such as a loudspeaker  and the frequency magnitude response of any line level or high level output   Although it requires a host computer to be configured  it can also function in a stand alone mode     SMX 6  IQ SMX 6 A sensing mixer with 6 mic line inputs and two separate output channels  With its automatic  functions  it can serve as a programmable automatic mic mixer     Software The programs that run in the    memory     RAM  of a computer or processor  The IQ MSD program  is software     Solo A feature that enables all amplifiers to be turned off except one  This is a very handy setup 
142. he example depicted above  AUX Input 1 will be paralyzed when AUX Input 9 is turned    on     This means that  any commands assigned to Input 1 will be ignored until after Input 9 goes    off     When Input 9 goes    off     the  commands assigned to Input 1 will be sent  depending upon its on off state at that time      If an analog input is selected as the paralyze input instead of an AUX input  the paralyze window will display  different commands  An example is shown in Figure 8 12     When Paralyzed  You can determine what actions  if any  will be taken when an inputis first paralyzed  The  choices vary depending upon the type of input selected  AUX or Analog      Page 186    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown       Fig  8 12 Adding a Paralyze Command Assignment to an Analog Input    AUX Input  You can prevent any commands from being sent by selecting Send No Settings or you can force the  current settings to be sent by selecting Send Current Settings  This latter choice will cause the    on    settings to be  sent if the input happens to be    on    and the    off    settings to be sent if it happens to be    off     You can also force the     on    or    off    settings to be sent regardless of the on off state of the input by selecting Send On Settings or Send Off  Settings     Analog Input  You can prevent any levels from being changed by selecting Send No Levels or you can force the  current level settings to be sent by selecting Send Current Levels  
143. he initial level for the Auto Level function when a gate    opens     Output Compression Threshold   set the point when compression begins  AMB 5 Mixer  includes all MPX 6 commands plus    Max Gain   set the maximum gain for an input of Channel 1  Low Set   set the    closed gate    gain for an input of Channel 1  Gate Threshold   set the point when an input gate    opens     Input Compression Threshold   set the point when input compression begins  Auto Level DAOL   set the Desired Average Output Level of each input of Channel 1  Idle Gain   set the initial level for the Auto Level function when a gate    opens     Output Compression Threshold   set the point when compression begins  Ambience Threshold   set the point when the AMB function will begin to operate  Equalizer   Output Gain   set the output gain  Filter   set the level of each equalizer filter    Max Min Level  The Max and Min Levels set the range for a level control  The Max Level is the level  used by the selected command when the input is turned up to its highest setting  The Min Level is the level used  by the selected command when the control at the input is turned down to its lowest setting     Page 183    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    8 5 5 AUX Output Assignments   AUX outputs are provided to signal other components in the system   including non IQ components  They can  also be used to provide monitoring capability to a custom control panel  For example  an AUX output can be used 
144. he time the Expansion Ratio can be set to 1 1 so that the output level increases 1 dB for every increase  in the ambient sense level  However  if the ambient noise level has an extremely wide dynamic range it is possible  to exceed the headroom of the system  This is when you will want to use the Expansion Ratio control to reduce  the dynamic range of the AMB function     Guard Band  The Guard Band control is an offset to the Threshold control  For example  if the Guard Band  is set to 3 dB  the threshold will be 3 dB below the Threshold control setting  It is provided as a tool for making  temporary adjustments to the Threshold level during setup  Normally  it should be set to 0  zero  so that the  Threshold control setting accurately represents the actual threshold     Page 160    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Threshold  The Threshold control determines at what ambient sound level the AMB function will begin to  operate  It is the sound pressure level  SPL  of the ambient sensing input  Input 6   When the signal level of Input  6 exceeds the Threshold setting  the AMB function begins to increase the gain of Channel 1 at the rate dictated by  the Expansion Ratio control     Ambient Offset  The Ambient Offset is like a fixed insertion loss  It is the level below the Gate function Max  Gain settings to which the Channel 1 gain will be set until the ambience level exceeds the Threshold setting  As the  ambience level increases above the Threshold setting
145. hese differences will be identified     To go to the amplifier Control Block screen for an  Q2 PIP  such as the  Q P  P MEM  IQ PI P SMT or IQ   PI P DSP select    IQ2 AMP PIP    from the Device menu  To go to the amplifier Control Block screen for a legacy  IQ PLP  select    IQ AMP PIP    from the Device menu     Figure 5 1 shows a typical amplifier Control Block screen for  Q2 PI P s  Notice that it is divided into three general  areas  an information area on the left  an area for controls in the middle and an area for monitoring on the right     Information Area Control Area Monitor Area       Figure 5 1 A Typical Amplifier Control Block Screen    Next we ll look at a sample control block from each IQ PP  and describe each part as we discuss how to configure  a control block     Page 115    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    5 1 Initializing an Amplifier Control Block  The control block for each IQ PIP  is shown below in Figure 5 2  They are all very similar     IQ P I P   1Q P  P AP  IQ P I P MEM  IQ P I P SMT  IQ P I P DP    IQ P I P DSP       Fig  5 2 The Control Blocks of Each IQ PI P  Model    The first step in initializing an amplifier control block is to set the IQ PI P  model  IQ address and Crown Bus loop  number  This is normally done automatically during a roll call  However  you can set some of these parameters  manually if you need to configure a system off line     IQ PLP  Model  The model can be manually configured for off line  Q2 P  Ps
146. hreshold of  2 dBu with a Compression  Ratio of 16 1 will attenuate an incoming signal 32 dB before the output level reaches 0 dBu  When used with the  Input Compressor Limiter  the Output Compressor Limiter provides some of the most accurate and predictable  audio system protection available today     Tip  If you re not sure where to set the Limit Threshold  press 2 to view the bar graph display  The yellow bars  above OUT 1 and OUT 2 represent the instantaneous peak output levels     Compression Ratio  The Compression Ratio control sets the amount of compression applied for every step  over the Limit Threshold  For example  when a 4 1 compression ratio is applied to a signal that exceeds the Limit  Threshold by 20 dB  the signal is attenuated 15 dB  When an infinite compression ratio  00 1  is chosen  the    Page 151    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    compressor works like a limiter and prevents the output level from exceeding the Limit Threshold  Note  A 1 1  compression ratio will have no effect on the signal     Release Time  As with the Input Compressor Limiter  the Output Compressor Limiter function responds  almost instantly to signals above the Threshold  The Release Time control sets the time it takes for the gain to return  to normal after the signal falls below the Limit Threshold     Output Limit  The Output Limit control lets you select which inputs are compressed  and which are not  This  is a highly flexible feature  and can be used in 
147. i ple ABCabe crete sizes     Fig  4 17 Sample Fonts  Size  Sets the size of stroked fonts  the range is 5 to 60 points   It also displays the relative size of a bitmap font    if one is selected  Several sizes of the CAM bitmap font are shown below in Figure 4 18     CAAA tonr a La pi    CAM font at 22 pt   CAM font at 28 pt     CAM font at 42 pt   CAM font at 50 pt     Fig  4 18 Sample Font Sizes    Color  Sets the foreground color of the font   There is no background color attribute because the background  of Text objects is transparent to allow the background of the graphics plate or other objects to show through      Page 86    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Shadow  Causes a shadow to appear behind the font and selects the color of the shadow   Bold  Increases the weight  thickness  of the font  The Bold attribute affects both stroked and bitmap fonts     Italics  Causes stroked fonts to take on a slanted or italicized appearance  The Italics attribute has no affect on  bitmap fonts     After a Text object has been created  only the Color  Bold  Italic  and Shadow attributes can be edited  To change  these attributes right click      to reopen the Text Attributes window     To edit the text in a Text object  double click       on it with the left mouse button  When a cursor appears at the end  of the text block  Figure 4 19   you can begin typing to add additional text or delete existing text by backspacing  over it before entering a correction  Whe
148. ic high   After  selecting the action field  use the    Space Bar    to toggle between the available choices     The dataframe parameter identifies the dataframe file name that you want to load or save     After you have finished with this screen  press gs    to return to the main Control Panel screen     The following controls refer again to the main Control Panel screen  Figure 2 12      Printer Port  Sets the destination for printed reports of the system settings  The reports can be sent to a printer  via a parallel port  LPT1 or LPT2  or saved to a file  To create a report  press  Fj from a Control Block screen     File Name  Specifies the file name to be used if the Printer Port option is set to send the report to a file  The  report is written as a text file that can be viewed and edited by most text editors or wordprocessing programs   Note  There is not a default extension  so you should enter an appropriate extension  like TXT      Ok  Closes the main Control Panel screen and returns you to the previous Control Block screen  The keyboard  shortcut to exit the Control Panel screen is either g   f lt   or         All control panel settings are saved to a TURBO  INI file when you leave the Control Panel screen  Note  Older  version of Turbo saved the control panel configuration to a CROWN DTA file  It can be deleted after a  TURBO INI file has been created     Help  This control opens a help box which lists a brief description of each system control on the Control Panel
149. ies all the settings of all the sub blocks of one IQ component to the sub   blocks of another identical IQ component  This feature is only available for amplifier and mixer sub blocks     Keyboard  First press f   to copy the sub block settings of the present IQ component into memory  This  causes    Copy    to appear in the upper right corner of the screen below the IQ address and loop number  Next   press ferd  f lt l  or fe   4 gt   to move to the Sub block screen of the destination IQ component   Use the IQ address  and loop number in the upper right corner of the screen to locate the component   Finally  press f    47  to paste  the settings into the sub blocks of the destination IQ component     e Restore Default Settings to All the Sub blocks of an IQ Component   Keyboard  Press    p lt j to restore all sub block settings of the selected IQ component  except drones   The  settings of legacy IQ PI Ps and mixers will be changed to their minimum values  The settings of  Q2 components  will be restored to their factory default values     e Moving from a Sub block Back to a Control Block  Keyboard  Press sc  from any sub block or press fs  from the first sub block or press f  then p7  from any  sub block  Note     Home    f  does not function in drone sub blocks     Mouse  Click the right mouse button       You can also move the mouse in an upward direction without clicking or  dragging until the control block is displayed     Tip  Press       from any sub block to open a h
150. igned to transmit IQ commands and data to IQ components  As a  standard it sets only the communication protocol and is independent of the wiring system used  Most IQ compo   nents can be connected to the Crown Bus with inexpensive twisted pair wire     Curve Object An object that links an SLM 8 test curve to a plotter object for display on a graphics plate   DAOL The Desired Average Output Level of the Auto Level function of an SMX 6 or AMB 5 mixer     Dataframe A file  stored on disk  which contains the settings and parameters of an IQ System  including the  configuration of each IQ component  control blocks  sub blocks and graphics plates     Decay Time An AMB function parameter that determines how rapidly the output level will be reduced when  the ambient sense input level is dropping  while it is still above the Threshold setting      Delay Time A Gate function parameter that determines how long a gate will stay open after an incoming signal  drops below the Threshold     Device A Crown IQ component  see Component  IQ System     Device Menu A menu that is used to select the Control Block screen of an IQ component  It is accessed by  pressing       Digital Meter Agraphic object that dynamically displays a level  such as an aucio input level  with a numerical    readout     Display A control that determines what will be displayed when switching to a graphics plate  If Display is set to     Selected     a GDM will be automatically displayed for each selected IQ component tha
151. igure 4 50  will then open so you can configure it  Its attributes are described below     Plotter Attributes     Fookground C H    Toot  n    E  Border       Fig  4 50 The Plotter Attributes Window  Text  Sets the foreground color of the text for the Plotter object     Background  Sets the background color of the Plotter object   Border  Determines whether or not the border of the Plotter object will be visible     Setup  The Setup button opens the Plotter Setup window shown below  Figure 4 51  so the X and Y axes of  the graph can be configured     Flotter Getug        Muto X Arie  Left    focke   Riget X Awis     E  Log    Arie       Muto T Acie  Tow T Awie   Bottom T Awie     Fig  4 51 The Plotter Setup Window       Page 108    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Auto X Axis  Determines whether the scaling and annotation of the X axis is determined by the range of data to  be displayed     Left X Axis  If the Auto X Axis attribute is turned off  this attribute determines the minimum X value to be plotted   Right X Axis  Ifthe Auto X Axis attribute is turned off  this attribute determines the maximum X value to be plotted     Log X Axis  Determines whether the X axis should be scaled logarithmically  If this attribute is turned off  the X  axis will use a linear scale     Auto Y Axis  Determines whether the scaling and annotation of the Y axis is determined by the range of the data  to be displayed     Top YAxis  lf the Auto Y Axis attribute is turned off
152. ill pull all inputs below the feedback level   The Max Gain To Track Control Block control  should be turned off   The ASA control can be toggled on and off from the Sub block screens by pressing    ETE  Note  Toggling ASA on and off switches between the sub block mix and the control block mix  This provides two  mixes only if Max Gain To Track Control Block is not turned on     IMPORTANT  The Max Gain control is not intended to be adjusted in    real time    while the ASA control is turned  on  Instead  use the DAOL  Desired Average Output Level  control of the Auto Level function  The new level will  not take affect until the Reaction Time setting of the Auto Level function has transpired     Low Set  The Low Set gain is the    gate closed    gain  Low Set is off by default  about    100 dB   Set it higher  if you want the signal to be audible even when the gate is    closed        Gate  The Gate function is tumed on and off with the Gate control  Turning the Gate control off also turns off the  Duck Priority and Gate Count functions     Threshold  The Threshold control determines when an input gate opens  When a signal exceeds the  Threshold  the gate opens causing the gain to increase from the Low Set value to the Max Gain value  When a  signal drops to the Threshold or below  the gate closes and the gain drops from Max Gain to the Low Set value   Note  If the Threshold is set too high  the gate will never open  or only open sporadically  If it   s too low     Page 143   
153. ing     Note  It is usually best to turn ASA off before switching to the Sub block screens and making changes to the  parameters of the automatic functions     Tip  ASA can be toggled on and off from a sub block by pressing e  fl     6 3 2 Manual Control from a Graphics Plate   Earlier we saw that mixer GDMs  like the one shown in Figure 6 5  provide basic monitoring features  Graphics  plates provide for tremendous flexibility to design custom screens with custom controls and this capability can be  used to design custom controls   even custom GDMs   for IQ mixers  One aspect to custom controls that is very  appealing is the capability to limit the range of a control on a graphics plate  Instead of providing a user with a gain  control having a fixed range from  25 to  100 dB  you could provide them with a level control having a range of   10 to  30 dB to prevent them from turning a level too high or too low  Depending on how you design the level  control  it can still appear to have a full range of movement  A sample  showing how custom graphics plate objects  can be used to monitor and control an SMX 6 mixer is shown below in Figure 6 8     Another advantage of designing a control on a graphics plate is that you can control the size and color  And you  can also choose to omit controls that you don   t want a user to have  In a control block  users always have access  to every manual control  In a graphics plate  you can limit that access     3    Lr     4    BREESHe K REGo
154. ini Plate function is selected  the Name attribute is the mini plate name  However  you do not  have to enter the name of the mini plate in the Name field  Instead you can press the Select button and choose its  name from the list  This is explained next     Select  This attribute is only available when the Open Mini Plate function is selected  Pressing it opens the Select  Mini Plate window shown in Figure 4 33 below     Select Himi Flate       Fig  4 33 The Select Mini Plate Window    Itlists all the available mini plates   including mini plates from all available graphics plates  Select the one that you  want to link to the System Button  After you press the OK button  the mini plate name will be entered in the Name  field  You can also delete unwanted mini plates with this window with the Delete button     Note  Mini plates are stored along with graphics plates in dataframe files     Page 95    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Plate    This attribute is only available when the Change Plate function is selected  It identifies the number of the  graphics plate that will be opened when the System Button is pressed  This is the number assigned to the graphics  plate in its control block in the graphics plate Control Block screen     Color  Sets the color of the System Button  However  it does not affect the border color     Hidden  Causes the System Button not to be displayed on the graphics plate  However  the button is fully  functional  Hidden System
155. ion equals or  exceeds 0 05   it displays    IOC        IQ Address Each IQ component in a Crown Bus loop must have a unique address  No two IQ components  of the same model that are connected to the same Crown Bus loop can have the same address  A valid IQ address  is any number from 1 to 250     IQ CAG Acircuit card cage that mounts into a standard 19 inch  48 3 cm  equipment rack  It is used to house  such IQ components as matrixers  drones and their LPS power supplies     IQ Component A hardware or software device which serves a particular function in an  Q System  For  example  mixers    Q P  P s  matrixers and graphics plates are all considered IQ components     1Q_INT  1Q INT II An  Q interface that can simultaneously connect 8 different Crown Bus loops to a single host  computer     IQ MSD A computer program  software  for controlling and monitoring an  Q System  It runs on a PC   compatible computer     IQ MSD Sys Config A computer program  software  for controlling  monitoring  scheduling and securing  an  Q System  It runs on a PC compatible computer  provides all of the features of IQ MSD Turbo plus multiple  security levels  automatic scheduling capability and the ability to create custom stand alone IQ programs that are  tailored to an individual operator     IQ   MSD Turbo Acomputer program  software  for controlling and monitoring an IQ System  It runs on a PC   compatible computer and supports higher communication baud rates as well as color VGA graphics with 
156. is function  first enter  the Search Loop number  Then activate the Search button  shortcut  press j amp    s1   If there is a break in the loop   Turbo will display its approximate location     Search  Causes Turbo to immediately begin searching the specified Crown Bus loop for breaks in communi  2  cation  The loop is specified by the preceding Search Loop   control        Solo Function Enabled  Activates the solo feature so the Solo controls located on individual amplifier  control blocks are enabled  If this control is turned off  the amplifier Solo controls will not work  It provides a way to  have global control over the solo feature     Emergency Mute  Activates the emergency mute feature which allows an operator to quickly mute certain  IQ components by rapidly pressing the    Space Bar    five or more times  The IQ components affected by the  emergency mute feature are all the mixers  MPX 6  SMX 6  AMB 5  and amplifiers with IQ PI Ps  including  Q2  PI Ps      Remote Emergency Mute  Activates a feature whereby an external logic signal sensed by an AUX port  of an IQ component is used to trigger an emergency mute     Address  Specifies the Crown Bus loop  component type and IQ address of the IQ component whose AUX port  input will be monitored for the remote emergency mute feature  Use the following procedure to determine the  address     1 Begin with    L    followed by the loop number of the IQ component    2 Use one of the following three letter mnemonics for the c
157. is section will describe each of the matrixer controls in it   Please refer  to Figure 9 1      DSPI   Master matrixers only   The Data Signal Presence Indicator is an LED on the front panel of all matrixers   However  the DSPI control is only available for master matrixers     The DSPI on master matrixers functions like other IQ components   it flashes whenever a data signal  addressed  to it  is received  It can be forced to stay on as an aid to troubleshooting by turning the DSPI control on  Turning  off the DSPI control restores the indicator to its normal function of blinking when a valid IQ command is received by  the master matrixer     Tip  Use the DSPI light to verify that all units in the system are responding to IQ commands  For example  turn  all DSPI lights on before a show to verify that all equipment is operating properly     Tip  When there is more than one matrixer in a system  use the DSPI light to quickly identify a particular one   For example  turn the DSPI light on to help a technician quickly locate a particular unit in a large equipment rack     Aux   Master matrixers only   Toggles the master matrixer   s AUX port output on and off     The AUX port also has the ability to sense the presence of an external signal  When a logic    high    is detected at  the AUX connector  an asterisk     will appear beside it     Relay On Off Controls  Each individual relay can be turned on and off from the control block by highlight   ing its number and toggling it wi
158. isplay screen using g  to increment and g  to  decrement the level  Mouse users can drag          the mouse up or down to change the gain     Page 134    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Input Signal Level   Net Gain to Output 1  Net Gain to Output 2  Gain Control Selector    Address  amp  Loop Input Number       Fig  6 3 A Single Input from an SMX 6 or AMB 5 Display Screen    However  if the levels are being dynamically controlled  ASA is on  by one or more of the automatic functions  like  the compressor function  the net gain bar graph will dynamically move like a    flying fader    to show that the input  gain is being automatically controlled  In this case it shows the net or final input gain setting that results after all  automatic functions have been processed  Do not attempt to manually control the gain of an input while it is under  automatic control     Gain Control Selector  An arrow is used to show which input gain control is presently selected  This is the  gain control that you can manually change if ASAis off  Use f    pto change the selection or drag the mouse       5   left or right     Output Signal Level  At the far right of the mixer Display screen are the two yellow output level bar graphs  representing the peak output of Channel 1 and 2     Note  The differences between the SMX 6 and AMB 5 versions of the mixer Display screen are  1  The  absence of a level bar graph for the Channel 1 of Input 6 of an AMB 5 because it is reserved as
159. itesane      E  Forder Soale Cossert    me       habe Whew Looked       Fig  4 38 The Mini Plate Attributes Window    PCX File name  Sets the file name of an image that will be displayed in the background of the Mini Plate  Container  The ability to display an image in the background of the mini plate is a very useful feature  It can display  your company logo  It can have a picture of a control panel that you complete by adding objects     Only PCX bitmap files are supported and you will have to use a third party paint or graphics program to create  the PCX file  If you use this feature  we recommend that the image have a color depth no higher than the one you  are using for the graphics plate  see also Section 3 2   For example  if your graphics plate is set to use 256 colors   we recommend that the internal palette of the PCX image also have no more than 256 colors  It sometimes works  best if the image has an internal palette with fewer colors  For example  use a 16 color PCX with a 256 color  graphics plate  This sometimes gives Turbo a better chance of matching the colors correctly in your image     If you decide to use a PCX image  you must keep a copy of the PCX file in the same directory as Turbo  The PCX  file  itself  is only linked to    not embedded into the container  Whenever the mini plate is displayed  Turbo  searches for the PCX file so it can read it and display it in the container  If you ever decide to distribute copies of  your custom dataframe file to o
160. ived     AUX  Toggles the IQ P  P   s AUX port output on and off  Note   Q P  P DP and IQ PI  P DSP models do not  have an AUX port     DSP  The Digital Signal Processing control opens the amplifier Sub block screen  It does not turn the DSPI  functions on or off  See Section 5 5 for more details     SEL  This control serves two purposes  it selects the amplifier to be included in either of the two Display screens  and it identifies the amplifier to have its GDM included in a graphics plate if the graphics plate is set to the Selected  mode     ASA  The Auto System Activate control serves two purposes  it serves as a master control to turn all automated  control functions on and off  Turning ASA off  restores manual control while turning it on restores automatic  operation     Page 121    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    The ASA control also serves as an entrance to the Sub block screen where the automated control functions are  configured  To display the Sub block screen  highlight ASA and press pete   or fx   When ASA is on  the correct  status of the IQ P  P  may not be reflected in the control block  However  the indicators in the monitor area of the  control block will accurately reflect the status     SOLO  Mutes both channels of all amplifiers except the one selected  Before this control will work  it must be  enabled from the Control Panel screen   Press Fj  to go to the Control Panel screen and tum on the Solo Function  Enabled control   To sol
161. l be displayed by selecting the IQ component  in the top list box and you can set the colors of the various components of the GDM at the bottom  A palette of 15  standard colors is available and are listed below     1 Variable 6 Brown 11 Bright Cyan   2 Green 7 Grey 12 Bright Red   3 Cyan 8 Dark Grey 13 Bright Magenta  4 Red 9 Bright Blue 14 Yellow   5 Black 10 Bright Green 15 White    The variable color is a custom color that you can create by mixing various amounts of red  green and blue  It is  set in the graphics plate control block  the graphics plate version  where it is referred to as the    Variable Palette     color  See Section 2 8 2 for details  There is only one variable color  Changing it affects all objects which use the  variable color     Page 59    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Finally  before we leave this section let s take a look a more sophisticated Attributes window like the one in Figure  3 20 for the Pot object     Fot Attributes    eg Multiples 2  eg Multiples 2  eg Multiples 4       Fig  3 20 The Pot Attributes Window    The Pot object looks a lot like a sliding fader  The name    pot    was taken from potentiometer  which is what it acts  like   a level control  Notice that its Attributes window has a lot more controls than the earlier one  It allows you to  set the range of the control and to select not only the IQ component it will control but also the specific function   channel and input it will control  This should whe
162. l forms   HP B1      st order Butterworth  HP B2   2nd order Butterworth  HP Be2   2nd order Bessel  HP B3   3rd order Butterworth  HP Be3   3rd order Bessel  HP B4   4th order Butterworth  HP Be4   4th order Bessel  HP LR4   4th order Linkwitz Riley    LOWSHLF1 Low Pass Shelving Equalization Filter  This filter type is available in only one form   LOWSHLF1      st order    HISHLF1 High Pass Shelving Equalization Filter  This filter type is available in only one form   HISHLF1   1st order    LP EQ2 Low Pass Equalization Filter  This filter type is available in only one form   LP EQ2   2nd order       Note  1st  2nd  3rd and 4th   order responses result in 6  12   18 and 24 dB octave roll offs   respectively              a          HP EQ2 High Pass Equalization Filter  This filter type is available in only one form   HP EQ2   2nd order    PAR EQ2 Parametric Equalization Filter  This filter type is available in only one form   PAR EQ2   2nd order       cl Gl e R A    Page 130    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Freq  Sets the  3 dB corner frequency for the low pass  high pass  low pass shelving and high pass shelving  filters  It sets the center frequency for the low pass equalization  high pass equalization and parametric equaliza   tion filters  The frequency must be entered in Hz  1 kHz equals 1000 Hz      Q  Sets the width  slope and gain of the low pass equalization and high pass equalization filters  It sets only the  width and slope of the parametric
163. l objects can still be used to change the system settings  but the controls  themselves  cannot be moved  resized or their attributes altered     Group Agroup of six relays that connect to the same bus in a MRX 24 and MRX 24S matrixer  Depending on  how the relays are wired  the groups can be combined to form either a 6x4  4x6  12x2  2x12  24x1 or 1x24  matrix     Guard Band AnAMB function setting that offsets the Threshold control  For example  a 3 dB guard band will    Page 207    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    move the actual threshold 3 dB below the Threshold control setting     Hardware The physical electronic component s  of a computerized system  The computer itself is hardware   An amplifier is hardware     Host Computer A computer  IBM PC compatible or Apple Macintosh  that is connected to an  Q System via  an IQ interface and runs the IQ program  software      Idle Gain An Auto Level parameter that sets the initial gain used when an input is first turned on by the Gate  function  It overrides the Max Gain control so that the Auto Level function will not cause sudden shifts in gain when  an input is first turned on     IOC An Input Output Comparator that continuously monitors the audio signal path through a Crown amplifier for  any kind of distortion to provide dynamic proof of performance  It does this by comparing the shape of the input  waveform to that of the output  The amplifier is okay when  OC is not on  displays    Ok      If distort
164. lar function     Control Block A specialized portion on the screen that directly controls one specific type of IQ component   Control blocks include controls  and sometimes indicators  that allow manual control of an IQ component  Some  control blocks can also be displayed on a graphics plate  See Device Menu also     Control Block Override A sub block control of an SMX 6 or AMB 5 mixer that places them in a kind of     semiautomatic    function mode where levels can be temporarily increased or decreased manually from the control  blocks while the automatic functions are operating  When used in conjunction with the Max Gain To Track Control  Block control  it allows a drone to control the input level even when ASA is on     Control Panel Screen Ascreen of controls that configure the serial communication parameters between  the host computer and the IQ interface  It also contains break detection and emergency mute controls  It is  accessed by pressing  Fl    Page 204    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Control Security Lock Acontrol that prevents the control objects on a graphics plate from being altering the  system settings with one exception   the graphics plate  itself  can still be edited  This means the position  size and  attributes of the controls can still be changed     Count Level The Count Level setting determines how many dB the Gate Count function will attenuate each  input as more gates are opened     Crown Bus Aserial communication loop des
165. lation  Store the originals and backup in  separate locations away from magnetic fields and temperature and humidity extremes     2 Turbo is NOT compatible with some third party memory management software   especially if that software  has DPMI services  As a result  if you are using a third party memory manager with DPMI  disable it and  enable HIMEM SYS and EMM386 EXE  Since memory managers are usually loaded by CONFIG SYS  as part of the boot routine  it will probably be necessary to modify CONFIG SYS to accomplish this  Refer  to the Appendix A for more information     3 Boot up your computer  Many systems are set up to automatically load and execute Microsoft Windows   If this is the case with your computer  exit Windows and return to the DOS prompt  Insert Turbo disk 1 into  your floppy drive  and switch to that drive by typing a  pete   Orb  peter   as appropriate  depending on  the floppy drive   s designation in your computer    4 After the computer displays the DOS prompt from Step 3  type installers      5 After a brief delay  you should be prompted for the name of the directory where you want Turbo to be  installed  Press peter   to accept the default directory  turbo  or enter the name of the directory you wish to  use  The installation program creates the directory if it does not already exist  Note  Some files may be  overwritten if Turbo is installed into the same directory as an older version     All files are then created and copied into the directory  These
166. layed  resize the container to fit the image while pressing g    The gT  key prevents the  image size from changing while the container is resized     Convert  Determines whether or not Turbo will attempt to match  convert  the color palette in the PCX image  with the one it uses     Save  Causes the custom GDM  including the GDM Container and all objects in it  to be saved to a GDM file in  the Turbo14 directory  It accomplishes this by first opening a dialog box to request the file name of the GDM as  shown in Figure 4 36 below     You do not need to enter the GDM extension  for example  you can enter AMP rather than AMP GDM   After the  GDM has been saved  it is available to all other graphics plates and it cannot be edited unless the Edit button is  pressed as explained later     Eater make of GEA File fre         Fig  4 36 The Custom GDM Save Dialog Box    Important  The Save button does not need to be used until after you have placed other objects inside the GDM  Container and have completed the custom GDM  Right clicking       on the GDM Container later will reopen the  GDM Container Attributes window so you can save the finished GDM     Page 98    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Edit  Causes the custom GDM to enter    edit mode    where changes can be made to it and saved with the Save  button  This button is necessary because the GDM cannot be edited after it has been saved  This prevents  operators from accidentally altering the objects in a cu
167. ld to  7 dB results in gain reduction whenever the  output level rises above  7 dB  Threshold can be set from 0 dB to  50 dB in 1 dB steps     Attack Time  Sets the rate at which limiter responds when the output level rises above the Threshold  Legacy  IQ PI Ps  The Attack Time range is 1 to 30 seconds   Q2 P I P s  The Attack Time range is 0 01 to 30 seconds     Page 126    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Decay Time  Controls the limiter response when the output level drops below the Threshold  Legacy IQ  PI Ps  The Decay Time range is 1 to 30 seconds   Q2 PI Ps  The Decay Time range is 0 1 to 30 seconds     5 4 3 Stand By   The Stand By function conserves energy by turning off the amplifier high voltage supplies when an input signal  is not detected for a predetermined length of time  It provides the biggest savings in systems where audio inputs  are not continuous     Stand By  Turns on off this feature     Gate Level  Sets the point at which Stand By turns on the amplifier high voltage supplies  For example  setting  the Gate Level to  30 dB causes the high voltage supplies to be turned off when the input level falls below  30 dB   Gate Level is adjustable from 0 dB to  50 dB in 1 dB steps    Turn Off Time  Prevents the high voltage supplies from being cycled unnecessarily  The Turn Off Time is the  length of time  in seconds  that Stand By waits before turning off the high voltage supplies when the input level has  dropped below the Gate Level  Lega
168. le in the same directory as Turbo  The PCX  file is only linked to    not embedded into the Container  Whenever the Container is displayed  Turbo searches for    the PCX file so it can read it and display it in the Container  If you ever decide to distribute copies of a dataframe  file that includes Containers with PCX images  you will need to include copies of all PCX files that are used     Border  Determines whether or not the border of the Container object will be visible when a PCX picture is  displayed in the Container  This attribute does not affect the Container when no PCX picture is used  Note  To use  the border  the Scale setting must also be turned on     Scale  Determines whether or not a PCX image will be scaled to fit the size of the Container object  Caution     Page 88    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    S  crown    If the Scale attribute is turned on and the aspect ratio  ratio of the width to height  of the Container is different from  that of the PCX image  the image will be distorted to fit the Container  If you want to make the Container size fit the  size of the image  start with the Container sized bigger than the image and the Scale attribute tumed off  Then link  the image and after itis displayed  resize the Container to fit the image while pressing js  t   The gr  key prevents  the image size from changing while the Container is resized     Convert  Determines whether or not Turbo will attempt to match  convert  the color palette in
169. lick on it with the right mouse button         Page 91    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    4 10 Spin Control   The Spin control object is used to control functions  usually multistate  that cannot be controlled by Pot or Button  objects  For example  a Spin control can be used to set a compression ratio  To place a Spin control on a graphics  plate  choose Spin Control from the Toolbox  The Spin Control Attributes window  Figure 4 29  will then open  so you can configure it  Its attributes are described below     Spie Comteol Attributes     ay 1 Heee T    fag Multiplier 2  fag Multiples 2  fag Rultipleser 4  fag Rultiplessr  amp        Fig  4 29 The Spin Control Attributes Window    Component List  Selects the IQ component to which the Spin control will be linked  All IQ components that  appear in the control blocks and all  Q2 components whose UCODE  OIF file  is visible to Turbo will appear in this  list     Function List  Selects the specific function that the Spin control will control  The function list will change to match  the IQ component selected in the component list     Background  Sets the background color of the Spin control  The border is not affected by the background  color     Text  Sets the text foreground color of the Spin control     Channel  Selects the channel which the Spin control will affect  This attribute will not be available for some IQ  components and some functions     Input  Selects the input which the Spin control will af
170. llation and permits you or your operators  to become familiar with the software     2 1 Basic Concepts   Turbo provides two methods of monitoring and controlling an  Q System  1  using standard text screens or 2   using custom graphics plates that you create  Each has unique advantages  After you have used Turbo to  configure the  Q System  you can then save all the system   s settings and all the graphics plates to a dataframe    file on the computer s hard drive or a floppy disk  If your audio system is like most  you will probably need more  than one configuration  one for each type of event it will serve  By saving each of these configurations to a  dataframe file  you can create a collection of dataframe files that enable you to quickly reconfigure your  Q  System  Simply    engage    the appropriate dataframe file whenever you want to reuse the configuration stored  within it     pss SS    a      S    lp  P   A  IP  a  A  ie  P  Ji  aie   P  Ji    coco a  TRAH MHZ    TA  ee S E  ae E E  oei E E        Text Screen       _   _             Lie   r      f    o    Si        _    BEA         Graphics Plate           Fig  2 1 Sample Text Screen and Graphics Plate    Page 17       crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    2 1 1 Text Screens  Several different types of text screens are available including Control Panel screens  Control Block screens     Display screens and Sub block screens  The Control Panel screens contain general controls that pertain to  the ov
171. low key colors for most objects and reserve bold or bright colors only for those things which  are urgent or very important     7 Use mini plates to provide help windows where appropriate   Mini plates are container objects that can  be made to appear and disappear at the click of a button  The objects that are placed inside them  will  appear and disappear with them  See Section 4 13      8 Ifa graphics plate is too complicated  consider moving some of its objects onto a second graphics plate    You can jump from one graphics plate to another with a system button      9 Consider hiding seldom used controls on one or more mini plates     Page 48    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    3 2 Creating a New Graphics Plate  Now that you have an overview of graphics plate design its time to delve into the details of constructing a graphics  plate  Let   s return to the graphics plate control block screen        Fig  3 4 Begin a New Graphics Plate at the Graphics Plate Control Block Screen    Here are the steps to create a new graphics plate     1 Begin by entering a description for the graphics plate  Up to three lines can be used     Standard Operator  Controls    was entered in the example above in Figure 3 4     2 Tumon the Control Security Lock control so that the controls you create on the graphics plate will not affect  the actual  Q System until you are ready for them to  You can turn this control back off when you have  finished creating the graphics plate 
172. ls for one function  Some Sub block screens contain more than one sub block  All  Sub block screens are accessed from a parent control block with the ASA  Auto System Activate  control     The ASA control serves a dual purpose  First  by turning it on and off  you enable or disable all functions in the sub   blocks  Second  it is used to gain access to the Sub block screen s   This is accomplished by pressing peter   or  fa when the ASA control is selected  Mouse users can simply move the mouse down  f  from the ASA control  without clicking     The next two illustrations show some typical Sub block screens     Notice in both Figure 2 18 and 2 19 that the status of the ASA control is indicated at the top of the screen  top left on  the amplifier Sub block screen and top right on the mixer Sub block screen   Although the actual ASA control is       Fig  2 19 The First of Four SMX 6 Mixer Sub block Screens    Page 34    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    located back in the control block  you can toggle it on and off from the Sub block screens by pressing     j f     When ASA is turned on  all changes are executed by the  Q System as they are made  Sub block changes are  not engaged while ASA is turned off     Sub blocks are only available from text control blocks   there is no equivalent on a graphics plate  However  if is  possible to create custom sub blocks on a graphics plate by using the objects which are available in the Toolbox   See Section 2 8 for a
173. mplifiers with P P2  compatibility have a dedicated    fault    signal   Allows the user to define the threshold for a fault indication  For  example  set the Input Drive Level to  35 dB if you do not want a Fault error message to be displayed while  the input signal is greater than  35 dB regardless of  OC status  The threshold can be set from 0 dB to  50 dB  in 1 dB steps     Page 127    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Report VIA Aux   Only available for the IQ PI P AP and IQ P I P SMT   Error reporting not only  displays an on screen message when a fault condition occurs  itcan also send a signal out the AUX port  It uses  reverse logic  turning on the AUX port when everything is normal and turning it off when an    error    has  occurred  In this way it can also indicate a power loss  When this feature is enabled it preempts the AUX port   allowing nothing else to control it  This occurs without regard to whether ASA and or AUX are turned on or off   Important  The Report Via AUX parameter cannot be accessed from the sub block of the  Q P P SMT   It must be controlled from a graphics plate     Prolonged JOC Warning  The Input Output Comparator continuously monitors of the amplifier for distortion  If distortion is 0 05  or more  an  IOC error signal is generated     IOC   IOC Error Report  Turns on off this feature     Time and Events  Use the Events control to set the number of  OC errors that must occur within the time  specified by the Time cont
174. n    4 7 Text   Text objects are used as labels and they are one of the few objects that can be placed on top of other objects  To  place a Text object on a graphics plate  choose Text from the Toolbox  The Text Attributes window  Figure 4 16   will then open so you can configure it  Its attributes are described next     color fs O aoe  E  Shadow H       Fig  4 16 The Text Attributes Window    Font List  Selects the font to be used by the Text object  A preview of the selected font is displayed at the bottom  of the Attributes window to help you make a selection  See Figure 4 17 for a sample of each font  There are two  types of fonts  stroked  vector  and bitmap     Stroked Fonts  The stroked fonts are variable in size between 5 and 60 points and are listed first in the Font List    A    point    is a typographical unit of size equal to 72 of an inch  However  whether 72 points really equal an inch  on your computer   s display will be controlled by the video resolution and the size of your monitor   Because the  stroked fonts are variable in size  Text objects that use them can be resized  For example  placing a Text object  with a stroked font into a container and then resizing the container will cause the Text object to be scaled along with  the container  To prevent Stroked Text objects from being resized  press g7  when resizing the parent object  A  disadvantage of stroked fonts is that they are not optimized for a specific size like bitmap fonts and so they do not  lo
175. n   dB steps  Low Set  Off   99  dB to  25 dB in   dB steps  Gate  On Off  Threshold  Off   99  dB to  25 dB in   dB steps  Delay Time  0 2  0 4  0 6  0 8  1  1 5  2  3  4  6  8  10  12  15  20  30 seconds    Page 144    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    6 4 2 Duck Priority Function    Figure 6 9     Ducking    is the attenuation of an input when another input with a higher priority is activated by the  Gate function  When the higher priority gate opens  all inputs with lower priorities drop to their Low Set values  To  activate the Duck Priority function  turn it on and set the priority level     IMPORTANT  The Duck Priority function is dependent on the Gate function  Both the Gate function and the  Duck Priority function must be on for Ducking to function     Duck Priority  The Duck Priority function is turned on and off with this control     Level  The Level control determines which input takes precedence  The priority can be set from 1 to 6 with 1  as the highest priority and 6 as the lowest  A separate priority level setting is provided for each channel  making  it possible to give an inputa different priority for each output channel  The Level setting is ignored if either the Duck  Priority or Gate controls are turned off     If only two inputs are used  there only needs to be two priority levels  perhaps 1 and 2   If you are unsure how  many priority levels will be needed or what the final priorities will be  start with levels 3 and 4  The prioritie
176. n also be monitored from a graphics plate  However  before this can be done  you must create objects  on the graphics plate for that purpose  Figure 8 2 shows a very simple example     Drone Analog Drone AUX Drone AUX  Input Container Input Container Output Container         g    Fig  8 2 Sample Objects Used to Monitor a Drone    Page 170    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    In Figure 8 2  an analog input  an AUX input and an AUX output are each monitored  This is accomplished by first  creating a separate drone container for each input and or output that you want to monitor  Then an appropriate  object is placed inside each container  In this example  a Pot object is placed inside the drone analog container  It  serves two purposes  it shows the level of the input and it allows you to manually adjust it when the drone   s ASA  control is turned off  An LED object is placed inside the drone AUX input container to monitor its on off status  An On   Off Button is placed inside the drone AUX output container  It serves two purposes  it shows whether the output is  on and allows manual control when the drone   s ASA control is turned off     When an object is placed into a drone container  it is automatically linked to the single drone input which the  container represents  A separate drone container is required for each input or output  See Section 4 15 for a  description of each drone object     8 3 Manually Controlling a Drone    8 3 1 Manual Control from a
177. n editing is completed  click      outside the Text object to deselect it     Text Object     Fig  4 19 Editing the Text in a Text Object    To reposition a Text object  move the cursor to the top of the text object until it changes to a cross hair  Then  click       and drag the text as shown in Figure 4 20     Tex t Obj act  Trent Cn pect  Fig  4 20 Moving a Text Object    Text objects can be placed on top of other objects  For example  one or more Text objects can be used to label  a GDM  Button object  or a container  When a Text object is placed on top of another  it links to it and moves with  it  In the example shown in Figure 4 21  PANIC overlays the Button     PANIC    Fig  4 21 A Text Object on an On Off Button Object    Note  Text objects that are wider than the object on which they are placed are clipped to fit and  although one  text object can be positioned on top of another  they are not linked     Page 87    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    4 8 Container   Controls can be placed directly on the background of the graphics plate  Butit is often desirable to organize objects  into logical groups  For example  you could group all mixer controls together and group all amplifier controls  together  This makes graphics plates easier to understand and use  The Container object is useful for visually  grouping other objects and adding aesthetic appeal to a graphics plate design  To place a Container on a  graphics plate  choose Container from the
178. n parameter that determines how much the output Channel 1 gain will  increase for every increase in ambient signal level over the Threshold setting  For example  a ratio of 4 1 will raise  the output gain 1 dB for every 4 dB that the ambient signal increases above the Threshold     External Algos An external algo  function  is one that is controlled  in part  by other IQ components  This  feature is available for the SMX 6 mixers and is used to link the Duck Priority and Gate Count functions of several  SMX 6 mixers together     Page 206    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Feed Forward Compressor A compressor that monitors the input level and adds attenuation down   stream whenever a preset threshold is exceeded   As opposed to a common feedback compressor that monitors  the output level and attenuates the input level      File Name The name given to a file that is stored on a diskette or hard drive  MS DOS limits the file name to  being no more than 8 characters with a 3 character extension  The IQ program will automatically provide the  extension DIQ     Font A particular style  size and weight of a typeface     Function Keys The keys labeled     through f2  that are located either across the top of the keyboard or  down the left side     Gain A measure of the increase or decrease of an audio signal level  Specifically  this is known as the voltage  gain  It is usually expressed in dB  decibels   To increase the gain just 3 dB requires that the voltage 
179. ndby 127  function keys 207  function list 73  76  79  81 83  92 94  113    G   gain 131  134  166  207   gain control selector 135   gate 207   gate count 153  155  207   gate function 143 144   gate level 127   GDM  graphic display module  20  46  53  63 68  71 72   137  166  191  194  207   GDM container 64 66  66  97   generator 198   global 123   glossary 203 212   graphics plate 20 21  38 41  45 69  120  124  137  140   166 167  170 171  172  191  194  197 198  207  adding a new IQ component 61   adding objects 53   autosizing an object 58   changing attributes 59   copy  amp  pasting an entire graphics plate 62  copying  amp  pasting an object 60   creating a custom GDM 63 68   Crown IQ icon 62   deleting an object 61   design principals 48   GDM  graphic display module  20  moving one or more objects 56 57   new 49 52   resizing an object 55 56   restoring 62   setup window 50   toolbox 53       Page 217    crown    graphics security lock  graphics plate  40  207  graphics setup window 50   grid 52   group 76  83  207   guard band 160  207    H   handle to cursor 74   hardware 208   hidden 77 96   high pass equalization filter 130  high pass filter 130  165  167   high pass shelving equalization filter 130  horizontal 74   host computer 208    l  VO 167  idle gain 149  208  imp freq 200  imped ref 200  imped w ref 201  impedance 200  impedance tolerance 199  in out 165  167  initialize   amplifier 116 117   drone 169 170   equalizer 163   matrixer 189 190   mixer 133 
180. ndependent link groups to be created     Load To read a dataframe file from a hard disk or diskette  Normally  a dataframe is also engaged immediately  after it is loaded into the host computer s memory     L An IQ PIP  control that Locks the two channels of a single amplifier together so that changes to one channel will  be immediately mirrored by the other channel     Low Set A Gate function parameter that determines the gain setting when an input gate is closed     Matrixer An  Q controlled routing matrix for audio  digital and DC signals  Several models are available  They  require an IQ CAG card cage and IQ LPS power supply     Max Gain A Gate function parameter that sets the maximum possible gain for an input     Max Gain To Track Control Block A sub block control of an SMX 6 or AMB 5 mixer that causes the  Max Gain parameters of the Gate function to be set equal to the input gain settings in the control block  Itis used in  conjunction with the Control Block Override control     Mini Plate A specialized Container object that serves as a popup panel on a graphics plate to display controls   messages or help  See container also     Mixer  IQ Mixer An  Q controlled audio mixer with 5 6 mic line inputs and 2 output channels  In addition to  main outputs  each output channel also has an  Q controlled switchable bus output  giving mixers the ability to  connect to large paging buses without being loaded down  Some models also include advanced functions for fully  automated o
181. nder the    All    heading and press saftj  p  and gsuetj p4  to  increment or decrement it  The output level change will be reflected by an appropriate increase or decrease of  each input gain setting        Tip  Turn on the Lock control to control all gain controls of both channels with either All control     Bus  Tums on off each channel   s switchable    bus    output  The bus outputs receive the exact same post   processed audio signal that the main outputs receive     ASA  The Auto System Activate control serves three purposes  First it serves as a master control to turn all  automated control functions on and off  Turning it off restores manual control while turning it on restores automatic  operation     Second  the ASA control serves as an entrance to the Sub block screens where the automated control functions  are configured  To display the first Sub block screen  highlight ASA and press eter   or fx   When ASA is on  the  correct status of the mixer may not be reflected in the control block     Third  the ASA control can be used to tie several sensing mixers  SMX 6s or AMB 5s  together in a large IQ    Page 139    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    System  For example  several SMX 6s could be wired with parallel inputs  Each SMX 6 would be switched on  as needed via the ASA control  A supervisor could use this capability to    listen in    or monitor events  It could be  used to control recording or to provide additional feeds for overflow seat
182. nger the increment   decrement buttons are pressed  the larger the step size used to increment decrement the value  Lastly  the Width  and Places attributes are active only when the Numeric attribute is turned on     Use 5x7 Font  Causes the Spin control to always use a compact 5x7 bitmap font  This can increase legibility  when the Spin control is sized very small     Width  Sets the maximum number of digits that are displayed when the Numeric attribute is turned on   Places  Sets the number of digits placed to the right of the decimal point when the Numeric attribute is turned on     Two spin controls are shown in Figure 4 30  The left one has the Defer Send attribute turned off and the right one  has Defer Send attribute turned on     a1 JH 44 H  m Send Button    Fig  4 30 Sample Spin Controls    Note  To change the attributes of an object after it has been created  click on it with the right mouse button         Page 93    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    4 11 System Button   System Buttons look like typical On Off Buttons but they are used to make system changes such as loading and  engaging the settings in a dataframe file or opening another graphics plate  To place an System Button on a  graphics plate  choose Button  System  from the Toolbox  The System Button Attributes window  Figure  4 31  will then open so you can configure it  Its attributes are described below     Function List  Selects the specific function that the System Button will per
183. nges to a graphics  plate and then exit it without storing it in memory  all of the changes will be lost  2       The number of graphics plates which can be stored into memory is determined by the complexity of the graphics  plates and the amount of available memory in the host computer     Restore  Restores the graphics plate to the last version that was stored into memory  This is a handy way to  undo changes that were made to a graphics plate since they were last stored     Flush  Removes all objects except the Crown IQ logo from the graphics plate  You can think of this as a    clear     button which clears the graphics plate  Note  Flushing a graphics plate does not remove it from memory  if it was  previously stored there   If you exit the graphics plate without saving changes all of the flushed objects will  reappear if you return to the graphics plate     Peak Indicators  This control only affects the pre built GDMs of legacy IQ PI P s  such as the IQ PI P  and  IQ PI P AP   It causes the signal peak to persist for a fraction of a second when an audio input signal of a legacy  IQ PIP is monitored with a pre built GDM     Screen Background   Variable Palette  There are two selectable colors  the background color of  the graphics plate and a custom color called the    variable palette    color  The variable palette color is available as  one of the color selections in the Attributes window of many objects  Click on the up down arrows in the lower right  corner of the co
184. nked to the IQ component it represents     Fig  3 25 A GDM Container    3 9 4 Adding Objects to the GDM Container  After the GDM Container has been created  it is time to add the other objects to it that will enable it to monitor and  control our amplifier  For this example  we chose to create the objects shown in Figure 3 26        Text objects  Button objects    CHi CHE    roel i    T          GDM Container       Bar Meter objects       Pot objects    Ske Hee ene    k    Fig  3 26 The Unassembled Custom GDM    Page 66    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    The objects are used as follows   Text objects  Are used to label the channels and the power button  We chose a fairly small 5x8 bitmap font   Button objects  Are used to turn the power off to each channel of the amplifier     Bar Meter objects  Are used to display the output audio signal level of each channel of the amplifier  We turned off  the border attribute for both and we turned on the legend attribute for only the Channel 1 Bar Meter  left      Pot objects  Are used to control the input attenuator of each channel of the IQ P  P  We turned off the border  attribute for both and we turned on the legend attribute for only the Channel 1 Pot  left      The completed GDM is shown in Figure 3 27 after all the objects were place inside it  It offers only basic functions  but it illustrates how a custom GDM can be assembled  You may want to design far more complex GDMs  complete  with mini plates that pop
185. nother  To autosize an object   press x  and the left mouse button  gx     and move the object to be resized so that one of its edges is close  to a parallel edge of the object whose size it is to assume  Release the mouse button first and then the key   Notice in Figure 3 18 that the smaller GDM assumes the size of the larger GDM               oa  Og  oa  og  L  mea    Fig  3 18    Autosizing    an Object    Important  The Snap to Object feature must be turned on for Autosizing to work  Press g amp 1   451 and go to the  graphics Plate Attributes window to turn on the Snap to Object feature  See Section 3 2 for more details     Page 58    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    3 3 5 Changing the Attributes of an Object   The attributes of any object can be changed as long as the Graphics Security Lock control is turned off  This is one  of the controls on the graphics plate control block and it can only be changed from the graphics plate Control Block  screen  see Section 2 8 1   You will not be able to alter the appearance or attributes of any object if this control is  turned on     The attributes are controlled from an Attributes window  To open the Attributes window of an object  right click once       on the object  The GDM Attributes window of the legacy IQ PIP from our earlier examples is shown in Figure  3 19 below        Fig  3 19 The GDM Attributes Window for a Legacy IQ PI P     This is a fairly simple Attributes window  You can select which GDM wil
186. nt Window for a GDM Object          cccceccsessesccsessescssessescesecsescesesneecsnesneecsueaneacsneseeseneenes 54  The Pointer Changes to Aid Placement of the New Object        c  ccccssssescsessescssessescesesnescsnesnesceuesneesaneseeseneaees 54    A GDM With a Legend  Left  and Without a Legend  Right    0 0    cescseessesessesseetesseesesneesteseesnsenesnesseeensneeeneeses 55  Re  sizing   an Objet  enne e E E iid aad  wanda NETES 55  Restoring an Object to Its Default Size oo    secescesesesseeseseesecseseesessesessesssseesecsesessecnesesuesussesnesneaseneanesesuseneeteneens 56    Moving a Single Object OA 56  Grouping Multiple Objects           c  ccccesseescsesssescsessesscsessecsssessessssesseescseessenssesscensuesusansueausansnesnsananeansensnsansenaneens 57  Moving a Group of Objects  iso ra a E ERRER ER N RRR TRR ann wae ti 57     Autosizing  an QDJECH ccc  ar II N E A N E een i 58       crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software                         3 19 The GDM Attributes Window for a Legacy IQ PIP    ssssssssssssssssssirsssssssssrreenssssssrreennsnnrrttnnnnnsrrrennnnnnnnrreennnsnrrrnns 59  3 20 The Pot Attributes Window 00    eeeseesestestessstssescsnssssnssnssneassnsssencsusseassensensaeeseensaeeseensaeeasensaeeneensneeneenaneenees 60  3 21 The Add Component Window           cessssesssssesesessessesessessssessessssessssssessesessneseeasseesecsesesneensseeusaneaeaneanesseneeneseenees 61  3 22  r MME Crown IO ICO 22222 coos a eek dee de ee ccc Mec ca
187. ntrol Block from a Graphics Plate           ccccccsecsessssessssscseessessseesecscsesssenssecssensseansansnsansensnesneenaneenees 31                              A Closer Look at a Control Block  An Amplifier Sub block Screen for an IQ PI P SMT  The First of Four SMX 6 Mixer Sub block Screens          ccsccccscscscsesescssescseescscsessesescsessesscsuesescatsssacsesucseecaeess 34  A Sample Sub block Help Window         c cccscsscsssssscsesseescsesseesssesssesssesssesssesseesssesusanssesueensseausansneansansneaneananeanees 36       The Emergency Mute Screen           ccccsssessssscsssssssssessesssseeseescsessesscsesssesssesseessseessansseeucansneaneansneaneananeensaansenes 37  A Graphics Plate Under Construction          cccccsssssscssessssesseesssesseescsessessssessesssseessanssesseensseansansneansansnsansananeanees 38  The Graphics Plate Control Block Screen          ccssessesessessesessecsesessesseseesessssessessesesuesnesesneensseenesnesesneaneessneeeetenes 39    The Graphics Plate Version of the Graphics Plate Control Block        c  ccccssssssssessessstesseecseseecsesteessnseneeseeaees 40  The File Menu              secessecsececsecsececsecsseeceecsseessesssesssecsesssuesssasseseeataessesassessesassesaesassesaseasseeaesasaneneesenseneeseneeees 42  The Dataframe File List Window          sceccesessesesseesesseesseseesneescsneesessesseesnsseesueesesneeacsneeseeeseseesneaessneeaseneeneeseeees 43  The Print Select Components Menu             ssssssessesssssssssssssssessssess
188. ntrol block to select the Screen Background or Variable Palette color  Then use the up down  arrows beside each primary color  red  green  blue  to mix a desired color     Each primary color has a range of 0 to 255 with zero being none of the color and 255 being 100  of the color   Setting all primary colors to 255 will produce white  Setting them all to 0  zero  will produce black  When you mix  a custom color  you may want to record the level you used so you can reproduce the color again later on a  different graphics plate     Page 41    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    2 9 Saving and Loading Dataframe Files   All of the settings of the  Q System can be saved and later reloaded  engaged  with dataframe files  To save or  load a dataframe file  press fF  to summon the File menu  As Figure 2 25 shows  there are three selections  on this menu        Fi     H  L  Far  H  H  L           Lint  Le  Far     H  L          Fig  2 25 The File Menu    A  Save Dataframe as   Saves all system settings and graphics plates as a new dataframe file   After pressing the ere   key  enter file name in the blank space provided  The file name can be only eight  characters long and is not case sensitive  Do not add an extension because     DIQ    will be automatically  appended to the end of the file name  Press peter   again to create the new dataframe file     B  Save Dataframe  Saves all system settings and all graphics plates to the current dataframe file  This  selecti
189. ntrols           ceceeceesesssessessessecsessesecseessessesaeeecsecsussuesaneaeeaseassacsessnteaeeaseeseesenteneaneeaneeees  5 3 1 Manual Control from a Control Block     5 3 2 Global Amplifier Controls         c ccccssssssssssessssestssessssessssssssessssessssessnsessssarsassnsasersaeessen  5 3 3 Manual Control from a Graphics Plate          ccccessssessssssssssssssssssssnesrsssesssssssassnssnesees  5 4 Automated Controls  54 1 ODEP Conservation yiscs  cat casiiaintantasraenaaniniiancasiiena nnn  5 4 2 Smooth Output LIMIET siinsesse astear ni Saien  5 4 3 Stand By occ  5 4 4 Error Reporting    seeen  5 4 5 Input Compressor  5 5  DSP Controls  i040 ceatiewnsanaiiana nanona a A EE AE  5 54 Signal Delay inei E EA  55 2  Programmable  Filters i e a E E EE EE  6 Monitoring  amp  Controlling Mixers        sssssssssssnsssnnnennnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 133  6 14 Initializing a Mixer Control BIOCK           ccccsssssssssesessessssesessesessnssssssssesssssesseseneasensasersasersasevsenssees 133  6 2  Monitoring    a MXE a a a ee 134  6 2 14 Monitoring from a Display Screen        cscsesssssesssssssssesssnsssssssssessessssssessnsansasensaseneees 134  6 2 2 Monitoring from a Graphics Plate  6 3  Manual Controls 2i   5  0tncesaienre Sarath cence tad elaine tke ardannt lentil  6 3 1 Manual Control from a Control Block           eccccceccessesseseeseeseseessessesstesesensensensenseneeneasss  6 3 3 Manual Control from a Graphics Plate  6 4  Automated Cont0ols      c2   d cs 
190. o   If the Display control  on the text mode graphics plate control block  is set to Selected  a new GDM will be  automatically restored for each selected IQ component just as if this were a new graphics plate  If the Display  control is set to Memory  the graphics plate remains blank     3 8 The Crown IQ Icon   The Crown IQ icon  shown in Figure 3 22  can be moved like other objects but it cannot be resized or deleted   However  it has a special function   double clicking on it with the left mouse button  4  summons the Toolbox  In  addition  objects cannot be placed on top of the Crown IQ icon  If desired  additional Crown IQ icons can be  created by pressing pT           fis               Fig  3 22 The Crown IQ Icon    Page 62    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    3 9 How to Create a Custom GDM   GDMs or Graphics Display Modules are a powerful class of objects because they are self contained mini control  panels for IQ components  Instead of manually adding several objects to a graphics plate every time you want to  add controls for an IQ component  you can use a standard GDM  But the GDM story doesn   t stop there  You do  not have to use the standard GDMs   you can create your own custom GDMs  giving them just the controls and  features that you want  The next time you call up a GDM for an IQ component  your custom GDM will appear in  place of the standard one     You can create a custom GDM for almost any IQ component   even older ones that do not sup
191. o 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    The typographical conventions used in this manual are listed below     Style Meaning  Bold Indicates important passages which should be read  It also indicates an important keyword    or keyphrase        Bold Italics Indicates a helpful tip   Italics Indicates a note  It is also used to emphasize a word or tradename     Typewriter Indicates something that should be typed exactly as shown     HEA we  Text or symbols inside a box with rounded corners  Indicates one or more specific keys on  the keyboard    ee Indicates function keys    mA Indicates that the first key should be depressed first and held down while the second key is  pressed    6 Indicates a mouse action     1 3 Technical Support  This software is backed by Crown s technical support system  If you need assistance that this manual does not  provide  proceed as follows     If a problem occurs  attempt to duplicate it keystroke by keystroke in an effort to identify the point at which it  Occurs     Take note of the software version number and date  This information is displayed on the start up screen     Take note of the date and version number of the manual  This information is at the lower right corner of the inside  title page     Have the details of your computer s configuration available  a printout of the AUTOEXEC BAT and  CONFIG SYS files may be useful  and have the computer running Turbo when you call        Crown Professional Audio Division  Technical Support   Fact
192. o a Crown Local Net  See  Section 6 4 7 for more information     The following list shows the possible settings for each Gate Count function control     Gate Count  On Off  Count Level    to 3 dB in   dB steps  3 to 12 dB in 1 dB steps  16 dB  Max Allowable Open Mics  1  2  3  4  5  6    Page 153    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    6 4 7 External Functions  SMX 6 Mixers Only     Figures 6 13 and 6 14  External functions are unique to SMX 6 mixers and each one must be connected to a  Crown Local Net  CLN   Select the    External Algos    control and press the    Space Bar    to bring up the External  Functions window shown in Figure 6 14  Note  An    algo    is a function and this manual substitutes the word  function except when referring to a contro  with algo in the name     An external function is one which is controlled  in part  by other IQ components  For example  more than one    MTPST COMPRESSORS LINITER ALHO g    EE  ERMe i  mi Lair    THTERRSPTS OFF  SLi HETE OFF       Fig  6 14 The External Function  Algos  Window    SMX 6 can be linked in a CLN so their Duck Priority and Gate Count functions work together  A priority 1 input in  one unit will override a priority 2 input in another unit  The number of open mics can be totalled among all the SMX   6s in a CLN and all open inputs attenuated to prevent feedback in a large IQ System     The CLN must be started in a particular order for reliable operation of the external functions  The procedure i
193. o an amplifier  select its Solo control in its control block and turn it on  Use gs7    7  to move  from the Solo control of one amplifier to the next     DUAL MONO  This parameter serves as a note to label the operating mode of the amplifier  It has no affect on  the operation of the amplifier because the amplifiers Dual Mono mode must be set in hardware  Possible settings  are Dual  Stereo   Brid  Bridge Mono  and Para  Parallel Mono      L1  L2  These controls assign each channel to a link group  L1 controls Channel 1 and L2 controls Channel 2   When linked  two or more amplifier channels can be controlled as a single unit  To use the link feature  first highlight  the link group to the right of L1 and L2  Then tap the    Space Bar    until the desired group is selected  There are  35 possible groups  A Z  1 9   Finally  select the link command  L1 or L2  and press    Space Bar    to toggle it on     While linking connects the controls of all units in the same group  it does not necessarily force them to the same  setting  As long as the Plus         and minus         are used to increment or decrement the level their relative difference  in level is maintained  until they reach the maximum or minimum setting   However  directly entering a level with    the number keys  does force all linked channels to that exact setting     Power  Turns the high voltage supply of each channel on and off  The control for each channel is located under  the    Ch 1    and    Ch 2    heading
194. of the Input Compressor  The release time is defined as the time it takes  the compressor to increase the input gain by 10 dB  The range is 100 milliseconds to 30 seconds     Ratio  Sets the compression ratio for the Input Compressor  The range is 1  2  4  8  16  32     to 1  Note  1 1  is the same as    off        Page 128    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    5 5 DSP Controls   Several Digital Signal Processing features are available in those IQ P  P  models with DSP capability like the IQ   PI P DSP  They can be configured from a special DSP Sub block screen or from a graphics plate  However  this  section will focus on controlling DSP from a DSP sub block because itis a bit easier  To configure the DSP features  from a graphics plate you would create a control  assign a DSP parameter to it and then set the parameter   Important  The DSP functions are not disabled by the ASA control     To switch to the DSP Sub block screen  press   4  from the amplifier Control Block screen  An example is shown  below in Figure 5 13        Fig  5 13 An Amplifier DSP Sub block Screen    5 5 1 Signal Delay  A signal delay is available for each channel     Delay  Sets the amount of signal delay in seconds  The range is 1 25 milliseconds  0 00125 seconds  to 0 175  seconds in 22 7 microsecond steps   The minimum delay of 1 25 milliseconds is inherent in the DSP system      5 5 2 Programmable Filters  Each channel can have as many as eight different cascaded filters  the act
195. of the signal  be doubled     Gate A logic term that refers to a circuit that opens and closes  or turns on and off   The Gate function used in the  SMX 6 and AMB 5 turns the mic line inputs on and off  Each input turns on when the audio signal rises above a  Threshold setting  When the signal falls below the Threshold  a preset attenuation  defined by the Low Set control   is applied     Gate Count An SMX 6 and AMB 5 function that adds a preset attenuation to each selected input when the  number of open inputs increases  The feature is often used to prevent unwanted feedback     GDM  Graphic Display Module  Graphic Display A graphic object which is pre configured to  display  and sometimes control  many of the key features of an IQ component  Most IQ components have a GDM  and custom ones can be created by the user for most IQ components  replacing the ones supplied by Crown     Graphics Plate Like a photographic plate  a graphics plate contains images  In this case the images are the  control and indicator objects that are created with the tool box  Graphics plates have control blocks and are treated  similar to other IQ components in that they are listed in the Device menu     Graphics Plate Base Color The background of a graphic plate can be set to a custom color with the  graphics plate control block     Graphics Security Lock Once a graphics plate is finished  it can be protected from editing by turning on  this control  When the graphics security lock is on  the contro
196. off state of the AUX port output  Relay   monitor the on off state of each relay  DRN 16   AUX Input   monitor the on off state of each logic input    Inverted  The Inverted command causes the logic output to switch    on    when the function being monitored  is    off  rather than    on        Page 185    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    8 5 6 Paralyze Setup  When the drone responds to an input it is sometimes necessary to temporarily ignore other inputs  When inputs  are ignored  their operation is said to be    paralyzed     Only AUX inputs can trigger a paralyze command     The Paralyze Commands Sub block screen is the last command screen  Use p  to advance to it  Then select  the Add button  The window in Figure 8 11 will appear        Fig  8 11 Adding a Paralyze Command Assignment to an AUX Input    Only one paralyze assignment can be made at a time with the command window but you can make as many  paralyze assignments as you want by repeating the steps described next     Begin by entering the desired AUX input number in the upper left of the command dialog box  This is the AUX input  that will cause other inputs to be paralyzed whenever it is    on     Next  enter the paralyze input number and specify  whether it is an AUX or analog input  This is the input that will be paralyzed when the first input is    on     Note  More  than one input can be paralyzed at a time by assigning additional paralyze commands to the same controlling  input     In t
197. oftware together with all copies    5  Ifthe Software package contains both 3 5 and 5 25 inch disks  then you may use only the disks appropriate for your single user computer  You may not use  the other disks on another computer or loan  rent  or transfer them to another user except as part of the permanent transfer  as provided above  of all Software  and documentation     Limited Warranty   1  This Limited Warranty and any implied warranties are effective for a period of ninety  90  days from the date of delivery  the    Limited Warranty Period     as  evidenced by a copy of your receipt  Crown warrants to you that the Software will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying documentation  during the Limited Warranty Period  You must report all defects  and return the Software to the location where you obtained it with a copy of your receipt within  such period to be eligible for warranty service        2  Ifthe Software fails to comply with this Warranty  Crown will  at its option and cost  either provide all corrections required for any errors  replace the Soft   ware or refund the license fee for the Software     3  CROWN DOES NOT AND CANNOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS YOU MAY OBTAIN BY USING THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTA   TION  THE FOREGOING STATES THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR CROWN   S BREACH OF WARRANTY  EXCEPT FOR THE FOREGOING  LIMITED WARRANTY  CROWN MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  AS TO NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTIES RIGHTS  OR
198. oge datafrorcc       Fig  2 21 The Emergency Mute Screen    The system will stay muted until it is re engaged or until you change the controls that are used to mute  such as  the amplifier All Mute controls and the mixer Input gain controls   While the emergency mute function is active you  can return to the control blocks or graphics plate by pressing   st  to exit the Emergency Mute screen  Then make  changes to correct the problem  All changes will take effect immediately  After the problem has been corrected   press            to re engage the system and the settings in all control blocks  sub blocks and graphics plates will  be resent to the IQ System     If you prefer  you can also choose to load new settings from a dataframe file by pressing   9   If you do  you will  not have to manually re engage the system because the act of loading a dataframe file automatically causes the  system to engage the new settings     Page 37    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    2 8 Graphics Plates   Seldom are two audio systems used in the same way  Even the same audio system will probably be operated in  very different ways  depending on the nature of each event or the abilities of each operator  How would you like  to have a custom control panel for your system  Better yet  how would you like to have a custom control panel for  each type of event  Or a custom control panel for each operator  This section will show you how to accomplish  this with graphics plates  
199. ok good at some sizes     Bitmap Fonts  The bitmap fonts are fixed in size and are listed last in the Font List  A different bitmap font is required  for each size  Because bitmap fonts cannot be resized  their size is selected when you choose them from the Font  List  Also  placing a Text object with a bitmap font into a container and then resizing the container will have no affect  on the size of the Text object  However  an advantage of bitmap fonts is that they usually look better because they  have been optimized for one size     The size of a bitmap font is included in its name and two methods are used to describe the size  Some bitmap fonts    Page 85    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    have a single number which lists the font s equivalent point size  like stroked fonts   Others list the size in pixels such  as 8x12 pixels   A pixel is the smallest dot of light that can be controlled on your display  considering the video  resolution settings of your system s host computer      Broadway ARCs BIT1X1   ABCabc    Courier ABCabe CAM26 ABCabe  Bmucnnmnne ABBa  e    hb36 ABCabc  Europe ABCabc Do2 ABCabe    HED38 ABCabc  HLV3  ABCabc  RMN30 ABCabc     Goth A iabe  Hoet ABlapy  Italic AB Cabe  Roman ABCabe    sans ABCabe The typefaces in the left column are      yy    stroked    or vector fonts that can be  Scaip dito  scaled any size from 5 to 60 pts  The  Simple ABC obc typefaces in the right column are    bitmaps that are only available in dis     Tr
200. omatically adjust its output level in response to the ambient sound level     Ambience Background noise or sound     Ambient Offset The level below the Gate function Max Gain settings to which the Channel 1 gain will be set  until the ambience level exceeds the Threshold setting  Think of it as an insertion loss     ASA The Auto System Activate control located in the control blocks of various IQ components toggles the  operation of all automatic functions on and off  The ASA control is also used to access the sub block screens where  the automatic functions are configured     Attack Time The attack time is the speed at which an Input Compressor Limiter function begins to compress  or limit a signal that is above the Threshold setting  It is labelled    Compression    and can be set to either    fast    or     slow        Atten An IQ PIP control that sets the amount of attenuation at each amplifier input  The attenuator controls  decrease the signal level coming into the IQ PI P  only   they cannot add gain to the incoming signal     Attributes The parameters of a graphic object  such as its color  function  etc     Auto Level The Auto Level function is available for the SMX 6 and AMB 5 mixers  Unlike the Input Compres   sor Limiter function that is designed to handle sudden or transient jumps in input level  the Auto Level function is  designed to control long term changes in signal level  It helps maintain a more consistent output signal level while  allowing transient peaks
201. ommands will vary depending on whether an AUX or analog input is selected     New Level  Sets the separate levels that will be sent when the Paralyze Button is on and off  This attribute is only  active when an analog input is selected and a Send New Level command is also selected     On  Sets the button color when it is turned on   Off  Sets the button color when it is turned off     Important  To be operational  Drone Paralyze Buttons must be placed into an Aux Input Drone Container   Setup  Opens the appropriate Attributes window for the Object Type selection  Figures 4 44 through 4 48      Drone Container objects and Drone Paralyze Buttons look like typical containers and buttons as shown in Figure  4 49     L    Fig  4 49 A Drone Container  Left  and Drone Paralyze Button  Right     k    Page 107    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    4 16 Plotter   The Plotter object is a graph that displays data versus time  For example  it can be used to monitor the impedance  of a load  The data is displayed as a curve by a Curve object that is placed on it  see Section 4 17   Multiple  curves  each with its own color  can be displayed on each Plotter object by placing more than on Curve object on  it  Annotation is taken from data stored with each Curve object and a user label is displayed along the bottom using  the same color as the curve     To place a Plotter object on a graphics plate  choose Plotter Object from the Toolbox  The Plotter Attributes  window  F
202. omponent type   AMP Amplifier with IQ PI P AP  version 1 45 or later    MPX  MPX 6 mixer   SMX  SMX 6 mixer   AMB AMB 5 mixer   MRX MRX 24 or MRX 12 matrixer   PSI Pocket Serial Interface   SLM SLM 8 system and load monitor       3 Specify the IQ address of the component after the component type   Notes  Case does not matter  Commas and spaces are ignored and can be added to improve readability     Here are a couple of examples     L1 SMX5  L3  AMP 1       SMX Max Gain Auto Compensation  This control is only relevant when programming an analog  input of a DRN 16 drone to control the Max Gain of an SMX 6 mixer  A better way to accomplish this is to turn on  the Max Gain to Track Control Block and Control Block Override switches in the first SMX sub block and then  assign a drone pot to an SMX 6 attenuator   Please contact Crown   s Technical Support Group for more informa   tion      Page 27       crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    System AUX  This control opens the System AUX Setup screen  a second type of Control Panel screen  The  system AUX feature allows an external logic signal sensed by the AUX port of an IQ component to cause the IQ  System settings to be either loaded  engaged  from a specified dataframe file or saved to a specified dataframe  file     The System AUX Setup screen is shown below in Figure 2 13  The keyboard shortcut to it from the main Control  Panel screen is  a   fa       Lak  Lak  4  H  H  H  H  H  H  H  H  H  H  H  H       Fig 
203. on  When set to Solid  on off controls will  appear to be highlighted with solid bold letters  When set to Blink  on off controls will blink when they are turned  on     Monitor  Should normally be set to Color  Use the Mono setting if your host computer has a monochrome  monitor     Fast Roll Call  Causes roll calls to run at the fastest possible speed  Most IQ components can respond to a fast  roll call but a few of the older ones cannot  such as MPX 6 mixers prior to version 1 3 and  Q PI Ps prior to  version 1 4   Make sure that all components in your  Q System can respond to a fast roll call before using it     Auto ASA on Roll Call  This control is only relevant if a DRN 16 drone is being used as an IQ interface   When turned on  the ASA  Auto System Activate  control on the drone is temporarily disabled during a roll call   during the uploading of system settings or when the settings in a dataframe are engaged  This allows the drone  to focus solely on the roll call for optimal performance     Roll Call  Causes a new roll call to be begin immediately  Caution  All graphics plates will be cleared     Auto Break Detect  Causes Turbo to report when breaks in communication occur and to initiate a search  for the location of the break  The serial connection between the host computer and the IQ interface is always  monitored when Auto Break Detect is turned on  However  not all Crown Bus loops may be monitored  depending  on the setting of the Auto Search All Loops control  
204. on does not prompt for a file name  The settings and graphics plates in the dataframe file will be replaced with  the new ones  Use the first menu choice  Save Dataframe As     and enter a new file name if you do not want to  overwrite an existing dataframe file     Note  Any changes made to the system settings or graphics plates must be saved before exiting Turbo or they  will be lost        C  Load Dataframe  Loads the system settings and graphics plates from an existing dataframe file  The  settings are automatically engaged after the they have been loaded     Once peter   has been pressed  a window displaying a list of all available dataframe files will be displayed  see  Figure 2 26   Use    p to make a selection then press pert   again to load and engage the dataframe file     Notice that this window also provides several additional features  The current path is listed at the very top of the  window  in the example in Figure 2 26 the path is    E  TURBO14         To move up the directory tree  select            and press peter  To move to a different drive or directory  select the drive letter  example      C       or directory name  and press fester  To delete a file  select it and then press m         To sort the files by name press ga   s 1      Page 42    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    SHE    1 1  E   RAO  Fr   OOo HORASL DD BAUR BES m     J     A   FETEF     DIG A   it    wE  T    4  Hai  L  P    Poia t        ost       Fig  2 26 The Datafram
205. onal   Hidden buttons can be used to create hidden hot spots  However  care should be taken using this attribute so that  hidden buttons are not    lost    on the graphics plate  If this happens  press m   H  to make all hidden buttons visible   Pressing pm     a second time will toggle the hidden buttons back to their hidden state     Refresh  This attribute only affects Buttons that are linked to UCODE compatible IQ components  If Refresh is  turned on and the Button has been placed inside a container object  every time the state of the Button changes  all  objects in the parent container will retrieve their state from the IQ component and redisplay themselves if neces   sary     Page 77    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    A sample On Off Button is shown in Figure 4 8     H     Fig  4 8 A Sample Button    Several Buttons can be assigned to the same function  For example  you can create three Buttons to control the  power on off function of Channel 1 of the same amplifier  If you do this  you will find that changes to one Button are  immediately reflected by the others     To change the attributes of an object after it has been created  click on it with the right mouse button          Page 78    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    4 4 Bar Meter   The Bar Meter object is a bar graph that dynamically displays a level  For example  it can provide real time display  of the signal levels of amplifiers with IQ P  Ps and some IQ mixers  Each B
206. onitored with the drone output  After you have finished linking a function from the list to  the selected output itis possible to go back and  using the Add button again  to assign additional functions to the  same output  In this way  more than one monitor function can cause the same output to turn on  or off      Page 184    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    The following monitor functions are available for each IQ component     Amplifier IQ P   P  without SmartAmp features   DSPl   nonitor the on off state of the Data Signal Presence Indicator  AUX Out   monitor the on off state of the AUX port output  Power   monitor the on off state of the high voltage supply of each channel  Mute   monitor whether or not the audio signal has been muted  Polarity   monitor whether or not the polarity of the audio signal of each channel has been inverted  Amplifier IQ P   P  with SmartAmp features  includes all the above commands plus     OC   monitor whether or not an IOC error occurs  ASA   monitor the on off state of the ASA control  MPX 6 Mixer   DSPl   nonitor the on off state of the Data Signal Presence Indicator  AUX   monitor the on off state of the AUX port output  Bus   monitor the on off state of the audio Bus output of each channel  SMX 6  amp  AMB 5 Mixers  includes all MPX 6 commands plus    ASA   monitor the on off state of the ASA control  MRX 24  24S  12  12S   DSPl   monitor the on off state of the Data Signal Presence Indicator  AUX   monitor the on 
207. ontrol block  forms a horizontal row on the screen  four text lines in height  Figure 2 17 shows a single control block     Information Controls       Fig  2 17 A Closer Look at a Control Block    The left side of the control block consists of information about the IQ component it controls  The IQ address and  Crown Bus loop number are listed at the top and are automatically entered as part of the roll call  They can also  be manually entered  making it possible to prepare dataframe files while the host computer is disconnected from  an IQ System     On Line    is displayed in the upper right corner of the information area when an active IQ  component has been detected by Turbo  Below the IQ address and Crown Bus loop number are three  information lines where you can enter the model  location and purpose of the IQ component  Most control blocks  allow you to type anything you want here  Some control blocks  like the amplifier control blocks  require you to  selecta model from alist     The right side of the control block contains the controls  The controls serve a sort of dual purpose  they can be  used to send a command to an IQ component and they can be used to display the current setting of an IQ  component        causes Turbo to upload and display the current settings of all IQ components in the system    Some IQ components also have special dedicated monitoring features located in this section of the control block   such as input signal level indicators   Because the con
208. ontrol is used to enable or disable all automatic features in the sub block  See  Section 5 3 1   A typical amplifier Sub block screen for a legacy IQ PI P   IQ P I P AP  is shown in Figure 5 11  and an  Q2 PI P   IQ PI P SMT or IQ P I P DSP  is shown in Figure 5 12        Fig  5 12 An Amplifier Sub block Screen for an 1Q2 P P     Page 125    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    The various SmartAmp functions are listed next along with their parameters     5 4 1 ODEP Conservation   ODEP Conservation enables the amplifier to automatically reduce its gain as the ODEP percentage rises  By  gradually reducing the gain before the thermodynamic headroom is exhausted  the amplifier can continue to  operate under severe conditions with very little  if any  change in fidelity     ODEP Conservation is displayed as an instantaneous percentage of amplifier   s total thermodynamic headroom   Subtract the ODEP value from 100  to find the remaining thermodynamic headroom  When the value reaches  100   the amplifier has reached its maximum capacity for its operating environment and ODEP limiting will begin   This is explained more fully in amplifier Reference Manuals     ODEP Conservation  Tums on off this feature     Trigger Level  Sets the point at which ODEP Conservation begins to affect the gain  For example  setting  Trigger Level to 60  causes the gain to be reduced by the amount specified by the Amount control when the  ODEP level exceeds 60   The Trigger Level can 
209. ontrols     The level can be changed in   dB steps with p   and js  t  g 1  This is the only way to change an equalizer  Level controllevels cannot be directly entered     Low Pass  Sets the  3 dB comer frequency of a low pass filter in kHz   High Pass  Sets the  3 dB corner frequency of a high pass filter in Hz     In Out  Switches the equalizer    in    or    out    of the audio path  Switching it to the    IN    position turns on the  equalization settings and switching it to    OUT    turns off the equalization settings much like a bypass switch on a  conventional equalizer     Gain  Sets the gain of the equalizer  Because an equalizer is often used to attenuate unwanted peaks in  amplitude response  it is not uncommon for the net gain of the signal to be reduced  Use the Gain control to add    Page 165    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    gain back to the signal as desired     7 3 2 Manual Control from a Graphics Plate  The primary way to control an equalizer is from a graphics plate  Each equalizer has a GDM or graphic display  module  A sample is shown below in Figure 7 4     However  you don   t have to use the GDM that came with your equalizer  You can create a custom one tailored to  your specific needs  See Section 3 9 for more information about creating a custom GDM     The controls on the equalizer GDM are very similar in function to the ones on the control block  They are  described next     er  DEBE                Fig  7 4 A Sample Equaliz
210. ontrols have been set  The CLN startup procedure gives specific instruction how to do this  Select the master  SMX 6 before turning it on     The System control can be turned on and off at any time after the CLN has been properly initialized     Page 155    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    6 4 8 SMX Interrupts Function  SMX 6 Mixers Only     Figures 6 13 and 6 15  This is a rarely used function that enables an SMX 6 mixer to generate a    pseudo     interrupt whenever an input is being overdriven  overloaded  by an input signal  A signal must be greater than   20 dB for this to occur  The remedy for such a problem is to turn down the hardware gain control of the affected  input on the back panel of the SMX 6 mixer  Only older versions of Crown   s IQ MSD Sys Config software used  this feature  This function is not required by current software     This feature comes with a price  the Channel 2 Output Compressor Limiter function must be disabled to provide  needed processing power to generate the pseudo interrupts     SMX Interrupts  The SMX Interrupts function is turned on and off with this control  When it is turned on  a  reminder  Figure 6 15  will be displayed to warn you that the Output Compressor Limiter function will be disabled  for Channel 2        Fig  6 15 Turning On the SMX Interrupts Function Will  Disable the Output Compressor Limiter Function for Channel 2    The controls for this function are very simple     SMX Interrupts  On Off    Page
211. or loudspeaker     Page 201    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    11 5 Exporting Data from an SLM 8   It is possible to export data from an SLM 8 to a file so it can be imported into other programs  Only DIF files are  supported  They can be imported by popular spreadsheet programs like Microsoft Excel and used to create  custom tables and graphs  To export data  first switch to the Setup Sub block screen  Second  select the channel  you want to export under the View Curve column  Third  select the curve s  you want to export with the View  Curve setting  Finally  press   1   f and a window will open to prompt you for a file name as shown below in  Figure 11 6     SELLS Bni LOOP j    Rese lati  aH   Start Freq z  Ease Carre Te DIF    Pilem            Fig  11 6 Exporting Data to a DIF File    You do not need to add a file name extension because    DIF    will be automatically appended to the end of the file  name     Page 202    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Glossary of Terms    Algo An algorithm is a set of procedures or formulas that determines the function or behavior of an object  An algo  is the smallest functional part of an algorithm  Think of algos as the building blocks of algorithms   that is  algos  combine to form a complete algorithm   Where appropriate this manual substitutes the word    function    for algo      AMB 5  IQ AMB 5  An ambient sensing IQ mixer with 5 normal mic line inputs and one sense input  It can  aut
212. ory  Use this switch only when low  memory causes Turbo to run erratically     Page 22    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Iv Causes Turbo to use a default VESA compatible graphics driver  Turbo is usually able to  identify the computer s graphics controller and use it for optimum graphics performance  Use  this switch only if Turbo is unable to identify or use the graphics controller in your computer     2 3 Establishing Communication   After the title screen has been displayed for a few seconds  it fades and the computer automatically attempts to  establish communication with an IQ interface and  if an interface was found  initiate a roll call  Figures 2 9 and 2 10  show the messages that may result if Turbo has trouble finding or communicating with an IQ interface           Fig  2 9 No Interface Found Message       Fig  2 10 Looking for Interface Message    In Figure 2 9  Turbo was unable to detect a CTS  Clear To Send  signal from the IQ interface  It then assumes that  no interface is present or that the interface is not properly connected  In Figure 2 10  Turbo thinks it found an IQ  interface and tries to communicate but cannot     Page 23    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Itthen assumes that the baud rate is not set properly and it tries to automatically detect the baud rate of the interface  and configure the host computer with the same baud rate  It assumes that the interface is turned off or improperly  connected if it 
213. ory Service  Plant 2 SW  1718 W  Mishawaka Rd   Elkhart  Indiana 46517 U S A     Telephone  219 294 8200 or 800 342 6939  N  America  Puerto Rico  amp  Virgin Islands only   Fax  219 294 8301    Fax Back  219 293 9200  North America only  or 800 294 4094  North America only   219 294 8100  International     Internet  http  www crownintl com             Page 13       crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    1 4 Installation   Turbo is a DOS based program  Therefore  while Turbo can run under other operating systems  refer to  Appendix A for information on additional operating systems such as Microsoft   Windows     the most straightfor   ward installation and operation is under DOS  This manual assumes that the software is being run under DOS 5 0  or 6 xx     DOS 5 0 and 6 xx use HIMEM SYS and EMM386 EXE to manage computer memory  So  both of these files must  be in memory for Turbo to run correctly     Before opening the diskette envelope and installing the program  please read the Software License printed on the  envelope  By opening the envelope  you agree to all of the terms of the Software License  In summary  Crown    grants a limited license to use Turbo on only one computer at a time  Please contact Crown if you need to  simultaneously run Turbo on more than one computer or on a network     1 Itis considered good practice to install software from a working copy  Therefore  make a copy of each of  the disks and use the working copy  backup  for the instal
214. ot assigned a value  This limits the total  number of inputs that will be used to compute a binary code to 15 even if all 16 inputs are grouped into a single  binary channel     The decimal values always begin with the lowest input number in a binary channel and increase toward the  highest number in the channel  For example  if inputs 5 9 are grouped into binary Channel A then Input 5 has a  value of 1  Input 6 has a value of 2  Input 7 has a value of 4  Input 8 has a value of 8 and Input 9 will be the strobe     Fortunately you don   t need to understand binary math to assign a command to a binary code because Turbo  uses familiar decimal numbers for binary codes  You are probably already familiar with this because the IQ  address switch on each IQ component also creates a binary code and yet decimal numbers are used for IQ  addresses  To determine the decimal value of a binary code  simply add up the decimal values of all the inputs in  the binary channel that are turned on  In the preceding example  Turbo will read a value of 2 for the binary  channel if only Input 6 is turned on  If Inputs 5  6  7 and 8 are all on at the same time  the binary code would be  1 2 4 8 or 15     There are a maximum of 32 768 possible combinations if all 16 logic inputs are grouped into a single binary  channel  In this case the highest possible binary code would be 32 767  That means that 32 767 different controls    Page 180    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    could be 
215. our computer can go  try the lower settings  first and if they work move up to the next one and so on  To test a setting  exit the Graphics Setup window  by clicking       on the Ok button and then go to the graphics plate by pressing the Display Now control   Turbo will usually display an error message if your computer cannot use the setting     6 Using the same Graphics Setup window   amp   F1   enter the file name of the background picture you  would like to be displayed on the graphics plate  You can skip this step if you do not plan to place a picture  in the background  The file must be a PCX bitmap file  preferably with 256 or less colors  8 bit or less    Some colors will not display correctly if the color depth of the picture is greater than the color depth you  selected for the graphics plate in the previous step  Mismatched color palettes can also cause problems  since some colors are reserved for system use  Be prepared to experiment to achieve the results you  want     A background picture can be used for many purposes  You can place a picture of your sound system  layout and then locate controls in appropriate locations over the picture  You can use a picture of your  facility and locate controls over the areas they affect  You can place an attractive picture of your facility as  an aesthetic backdrop  see Figure 3 6   Or you can use the background picture to add to the artistic  design of your graphics plate in a variety of ways     Page 50    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 
216. p freq 199   store 167   store  graphics plate  41   string 212   sub block 19  34 36  172  173 187  212    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    sweep 199  sweep enable 198  sync 199  system 155  system  amp  load monitor 195 202  channel 200  configuration 198 201  exporting data 202  generator 198  sweep 199  test 199  system AUX 28  system button 94 96  system parameter  address 27  auto ASAon roll call 26  auto break detect 26  auto search all loops 26  base address 25  baud rate 25  display 26  emergency mute 27  fast roll call 26  interrupt 25  monitor 26  online search 26  portactive 26  printer port 29  remote emergency mute 27  roll call 26  search 27  serial port 25  SMX max gain auto compensation 27  solo function enabled 27  system AUX 28  system parameters 25  system requirements 12    S   crown    T  T board 212  technical support 13  test 199  text 85 212  text screen  Control Block screens 18 21  30 33  Control Panel screens 18  25  Display screens 19  Sub block screens 19  34  text screens 18  threshold 126  128  143  146  161 212  time  amp  events 128  toggle 212  tolerance 199  toolbox 53  212  bar meter 79 80  clock 91  container 88 90  curve 111 112  digital meter 81 82  drone objects 104 107  GDM container 97  graphic display module  GDM  71 72  LED 83 84  line 103  miniplate 100 102  on off button 76 78  plotter 108 110  pot 73 75  spin control 92 93  system button 94 96  text 85  top Y axis 109  training a drone 173 187  transponder mode 18
217. peration  See AMB 5  MPX 6 and SMX 6 also     MPX 6  IQ MPX 6  A mixer with 6 mic line inputs and two separate output channels  It provides basic IQ   controlled mixing and signal routing capabilities     ing mic  line  loudspeaker  digital and DC signals  Master and slave  S  models are available  The MRX 24 and  MRX 24S have 24 pairs of low current double pole  single throw  DPST  relays grouped into four 6x1 matrices     MRX 24  MRX 24S  MRX 12  MRX 12S  IQ MRX     Matrixers with IQ controlled relays for rout     Page 209    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    The MRX 12 and MRX 12S have 12 single high current single pole  single throw  SPST  relays     Mute An IQ PIP control that turns the input of each channel on or off  The    off    position sets the input attenuators  to their maximum value     50 dB      ODEP An indicator in the amplifier  IQ PP  control blocks that shows the status of the Output Device Emulation  Protection circuitry for each channel  It displays the percent of thermal dynamic energy reserve that is presently  being used by the amplifier  If 100  has been consumed  ODEP limiting will begin to protect the amplifier     Offset The Offset  listed at the bottom of the Control Block screens  indicates the position of the control block  where the cursor is presently located  Its position is referenced from the top or first control block  For example  the  first control block is Offset 1  the second control block is Offset 2  the third 
218. plate  All IQ components that appear in the control blocks and all  Q2 components whose UCODE  OIF file  is  visible to Turbo will appear in this list     Include Legend  Some GDMs have an optional legend to label its various controls and indicators  If this  check box is enabled  you can use it to control whether or not the legend will be included with the GDM     Tip  Ifyou plan to place more than one copy of the same GDM side by side on a graphics plate  you can include  the legend for the first GDM only  It will serve the other GDMs     OK  Press this button to accept the settings  Afterward the pointer will change to a question mark with an outline  of the GDM as shown in Figure 3 11  Click    on an unused portion of the graphics plate or an unused portion  of a container to place the new object     There are many different GDMs so we won t try to show them here  Each one is discussed in the sections later  in this manual which concentrate on specific IQ components     Cancel  Press this button to cancel the request to create a GDM and close the GDM Select Components  window     Note  Many GDMs provide real time display of input or output audio signal levels  As a result  each one requires  processing time from the host computer  As more GDMs are placed on the graphics plate  the response time of  the monitor functions may slow     Right click      on a GDM to open its Attributes window in case any attributes need to be changed     Page 72    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ
219. plifier s Reference Manual for more information  about ODEP     5 2 2 Monitoring from a Display Screen   Amore graphical way to simultaneously monitor six or eight amplifiers is with the Display screens  There are two  versions  a 6 Bar and an 8 Bar Display screen  The only difference between them is that the 8 Bar version uses  narrower columns  allowing two more amplifiers to be displayed than the 6 Bar version  Use f2  and     to  access them from the Control Block screen  The 6 Bar Display screen is shown in Figure 5 5 and the 8 Bar  version is shown in Figure 5 6  To leave a Display screen  press st  or fF   This returns the display to the  Control Block screen     The Sel  Selected  control in the control block of each amplifier determines if it will appear in the Display screen   All amplifiers will be available to the Display screens if no Sel controls are turned on  If more amplifiers have been  selected than can be displayed at one time  use f    and       to scroll through them     Page 118    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    ODEP  amp  IOC  Indicators       Input  amp  Output  Levels       Power Status              Loop  amp Address                  Fig  5 5 A 6 Bar Amplifier Display Screen    aa AA aa AA aa AA aa pA aa pa aa pa aa pa  Uk Gk Ok Ok Uk Tk Uk Gk Ok OK Uk Gk Uk Gk       Fig  5 6 An 8 Bar Amplifier Display Screen    ODEP  amp  IOC Indicators  Just like the amplifier control blocks  the amplifier Display screen show the ODEP  level 
220. port UCODE   Crown s  Q2 protocol for third party developers   Here are the steps     1 Prepare an OIF  Object Information File  for the IQ component    2 Exit and restart Turbo so it will use the OIF    3 Create a GDM container    4 Add objects to the GDM container to control monitor the IQ component   5 Save the GDM     Let s use an amplifier with a legacy IQ PIP for an example again  The following sections will discuss the six steps  above in greater     3 9 1 Preparing an OIF   Before a GDM can be created for an IQ component  an object information file  OIF  must exist for the IQ  component  All UCODE compatible IQ components have an OIF  Non UCODE IQ components may or may not  have an OIF  Check the directory in which Turbo is installed for OIFs to see if one exists for the intended IQ  component  Note  All O Fs must reside in the Turbo14 directory or Turbo will not use them     An OIF is a text file which can be created or edited with most text editors or word processors  Four lines are  required for legacy IQ components  non UCODE  as shown below      Component     ID SOF   Description Legacy IQ PIP  GDMFileName AMP  GDM    Note  IQ2  UCODE  components also require a fifth version line which cannot be edited      Component   The first line marks the beginning of the IQ component information section  It must be spelled  exactly as shown with a beginning and closing bracket     ID   The second line identifies the IQ component type with an ID code  The ID codes for variou
221. purpose of the graphics plate will be to control the background music level in a waiting  room  To accomplish this the staff member will need to monitor the output level of Channel 1 of the amplifier  and control the input attenuator control on Channel 1 of the  IQ PI P MEM     2 Operator  The skill level of the operator is low  They are not familiar with audio and so the graphics plate  design must take this into account  In addition  the sound level should never be turned completely off  because it is also used by the alarm system     You could begin by placing a GDM for the  Q P  P MEM on the graphics plate  One will be automatically placed  there if the Display control on the graphics plate control block is set to Selected mode and the Sel control of the    Page 45    crown 1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    IQ PI P MEM  located on its control block  is turned on  Or  you can manually place a GDM on the graphics  plate using the Toolbox  It would look like the one shown in Figure 3 1     However  a standard GDM is probably not the best choice here because it gives the operator too many controls        Fig  3 1 The Graphic Display Module  GDM  for an IQ P I P MEM    Remember in this example that our operator is an audio novice and will probably be easily intimidated by a  complex looking GDM  This GDM includes controls for both Channels 1 and 2  It shows both the input and output  levels  ODEP level  IOC status  provides a full range level control for both inp
222. r  Being the CLN master will not  affect its normal operation  After the master is selected  the Duck  Gate Count and Ext Algos controls should be set  for each SMX 6  To do this  first select the SMX 6 from the list in the External Functions window then highlight each  control and toggle it on or offas desired  Each time a different SMX 6 is selected in the External Functions window   the controls will change to show the its current settings     Master  One SMX 6in a CLN must be the master  With the System control off  choose one of the SMX 6s listed  in the External Functions window and turn its Master control on     IMPORTANT  Only one SMX 6 should be the master  Make sure that the Master control of all  other units is turned off  Neither the CLN or the SMX 6s will function properly if more than one unit is selected as  a master     Duck  Turn the Duck control on for all SMX 6s in a CLN which you want to respond to external Duck Priority  function     Gate Count  Turn the Gate Count control on for all SMX 6s in a CLN which you want to respond to external  Gate Count function     Ext Algos  The Ext Algos control enables the unit to work with external functions  Turn it on for all SMX 6s  which you want to participate in the CLN  Turning Ext Algos off will prevent the Duck Priority and Gate Count  functions from responding to external information on the CLN     System  The System control activates the CLN  It should only be turned on for the first time after the preceding  c
223. r consistent input  levels   but sometimes the unexpected happens and an extremely loud input signal is present  The Input  Compressor Limiter function    reins in    input signals that suddenly become too loud  If the excessive loudness of  the input signal is not transitory but is sustained  use the Auto level function to control it  Section 6 4 4      Compress  The Input Compressor Limiter function is turned on and off with this control     Threshold  The Threshold control sets the level at which compression begins  A signal at this level or below  is not affected  and a signal that goes above this level is compressed     Ratio  The Ratio control sets the amount of compression applied for every step over the Threshold  This is  commonly referred to as a    compression ratio     For example  when a 4 1 compression ratio is applied to a signal  that exceeds the Threshold by 20 dB  the signal is attenuated 15 dB  When an infinite compression ratio  20 1  is  chosen  the compressor works like a limiter and prevents the level from exceeding the Threshold  Note  A 1 1  compression ratio will not affect an incoming signal     Release Time  Any input level increase over the Threshold is compressed almost instantly  The Release  Time function controls the time it takes for the gain to return to normal when the level drops below the Threshold   Short release times allow the compressor to respond to rapid changes in input level     Compression  Attack Time   This feature is available
224. r of Open Mics   When only two or three mics are open   system gain is usually too low to cause feedback  But as more mics open  the system gain can increase enough  to cause feedback     Gate Count  Immediately to the right of the Gate Count label is the master on off control  Turn on this control to  activate the Gate Count function     IMPORTANT  The Gate Count function is dependent on the Gate function  Both the Gate function and the Gate  Count function must be on for the latter to function     Each input also has an individual on off control for each output channel  They are located across the bottom of the  screen and are used to control which inputs participate in the Gate Count function  Inputs with this control turned  off are not counted     Count Level  The Count Level control determines how much each input is attenuated as more gates open   It is entered in dB  When only one mic in a count group is active  there is no added attenuation  Each additional  open mic increases the attenuation by the    Count Level     For example  if the Count Level were 3 dB and six mics  were open  the attenuation would be 15 dB  or  NOM     1  x Count Level     Max Allowable Open Mics  Sets the maximum number of inputs that will be allowed to open at the same  time  The Gate Count function will not allow additional inputs to open regardless of their priority when the maximum  number has been reached     Gate Counting can be shared between more than one SMX 6 if they are connected t
225. r on the back panel of the unit  Units with version 1 3 firmware will be labeled    V 1 3         The purpose of the Auto Leveler Gate control is to help create smoother transitions when both the Gate and Auto  Level functions are operating  Both of these functions must be operating for this feature to work     The    Open to idle gain    setting is best for systems with relatively constant sound levels as with background music   When an input gate is opened  its gain is set to the Idle Gain setting  See the description of the Idle Gain control for  more information     The    Open to last position    setting is best for systems with widely varying sound levels where an Idle Gain setting  is difficult to choose  When an input gate opens  the Idle Gain setting is ignored and the gain is restored to the  previous level it had just prior to its closing  An example of when this setting is very useful is when speakers with  very different voice levels share the same microphone     The following list shows the possible settings for each Auto Level function control  Note  All dB settings are dBu     Auto Level  On Off   DAOL   Desired Average Output Level  Off   99  dB to  25 dB in   dB steps  Reaction Time  0 2  0 4  0 6  0 8  1  1 5  2  3  4  6  8  10  12  15  20  30 seconds  Idle Gain  Off   99  dB to  25 dB in   dB steps   Auto Leveler Gate Function  Open to idle gain Open to last position    Page 149    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Page 150    IQ MSD Tu
226. r settings  a single generator can be used for all of them     Resolution  Sets the frequency step size of the test sweeps  It can be set to Ya  Yi     1   4       and  1 octave steps  Less resolution  higher numbers  will result in faster sweeps with less detail if the Sync  parameter is turned off  Higher resolution  smaller fractions  will result in slower sweeps with more detail  If  multiple units are synchronized  their Resolution settings must match     Start Freq  Sets the frequency at which the generator will start the test sweeps  Although you can set this  parameter in 1 Hz steps  the actual starting frequency will be equal to the closest octave setting as determined  by the previous Resolution parameter  The lowest possible setting is 20 Hz and the Start Freq setting should  always be lower than the Stop Freq setting  If multiple units are synchronized  their Start Freq settings must  match     Stop Freq  Sets the frequency at which the generator will stop the test sweeps  Although you can set this  parameter in 1 Hz steps  the actual stopping frequency will be equal to the closest octave setting as determined  by the previous Resolution parameter  The highest possible setting is 22000 Hz  22 kHz  and the Stop Freq  setting should always be higher than the Start Freq setting  If multiple units are synchronized  their Stop Freq  settings must match     Sync  Turn on this control if multiple units are being synchronized together  Turn it off if this is not the case 
227. rbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown       Fig  6 13 The Fourth SMX 6 Sub block Screen    6 4 5 Output Compressor Limiter Function    Figure 6 13  Even if every input is compressed  there is still a chance that the mix might become too loud  The  Output Compressor Limiter function keeps the output from exceeding a predetermined level  It s especially  valuable when used as an output limiter for the protection of amplifiers  loudspeakers and other audio equipment     It works in a very interesting way  Instead of compressing the signal on the mixing bus  it compresses the signal  at each input  Compression occurs only when the mix exceeds the Limit Threshold  It doesn   t matter how loud a  particular input gets  the mix which feeds each output channel must exceed the Limit Threshold before compres   sion occurs     The controls that configure the Output Compressor Limiter function are very similar to those of the Input Compres   sor Limiter function     Compressor Limiter  The Output Compressor Limiter function is turned on and off with this control     Limit Threshold  The Limit Threshold control sets the peak signal level above which compression occurs   Ifthe mixer is connected to audio equipment that has a specified maximum input voltage  it is easy to limit the mixer   s  output to that level  If the specified input level were 0 dBu  0 775 V   the Limit Threshold could be set to 0 and the  Compression Ratio set to 22 1  In practice  this is a little harsh  A Limit T
228. re we delve into the details of graphics plate design  let s discuss a few general principals     3 1 Overview   There are two things to consider before designing a graphics plate  its purpose and its intended user  You may  want to write down the purpose and then list all the things that it will need to carry out that purpose  The purpose  will determine which types of control and monitor objects will be required  It is important to consider the intended  user or operator in order to design a graphics plate that is as friendly and easy to use as possible for the operator   What is the skill level of the operator  How much control should he or she be allowed to have over the system   How will the graphics plate be used under various conditions   including emergencies  These questions are  important to designing a good graphics plate  Sometimes you will need to design more than one graphics plate for  an operator  They can be linked with system buttons that allow the operator to jump from one graphics plate to  another     3 1 1 A Simple Example   Usually the best graphics plate designs are the simplest  Let s look at a very simple example  A doctor   s office  needs a graphics plate so one of its staff can control the background music level of the patient waiting room from  a remote location  Channel 1 of a Crown amplifier with an  Q P  P MEM module drives the loudspeakers in the  waiting room     Let s begin by answering the two questions we posed earlier     1 Purpose  The 
229. ributes Window            steseesessestetestesteesteeteeeneene     108  The Plotter Setup Window         108  A Sample Plotter Object                    109  A Plotter Object with a Curve Object uo    cesceesseestesteseeeseeteneees    109    The Plotter Cursor Displays the Value of Each Graph Coordinate      The Curve Attributes Window  i e    One Curve Object on a Plotter Object    wn 12  Two Curve Objects on a Plotter Object                   we 12  An Unlinked Curve Object on the Graphics Plate     we 12  The String Attributes Window           cceeeseeceseeseeeeees we 13    A Sample String Object              A Typical Amplifier Control Block Screen      The Control Blocks of Each IQ PI P Model ie  Available  Q2 PI P  Models List              we AT  Amplifier Model List                0  A6 Bar Amplifier Display Screen      es  An 8 Bar Amplifier Display Screen          ccccsssescessessesesseesssesssescsesseessseeseesssesssensseencansneensansneaneananeansenaneaneananes 119  Monitoring Amplifiers with Graphics Display GDMS            cccccssssesccssssessssesseenssesneensneansensnesusanssssestesseeaneets 120  An Amplifier Control Block Screen es  The Amplifier    All     Global  Controls          ccssscsesessessesessessesessessesessessssesssssssessecssseeneeusseenseussseuesuesesussneessneeneeees  Manual Amplifier Control with Custom Controls on a Graphics Plate           ccccscssessessssestesssrestserstestsensneeeerenes  An Amplifier Sub block Screen for a Legacy IQ PIP tcc 
230. rly run Turbo under Windows  you may want to obtain a better communications driver such as  TurboCom 2  TurboCom 2 was specifically designed to improve the reliability of serial communications of DOS  programs running under Windows  At the time of this printing it was available for  29 95  U S  dollars  plus  shipping and handling charges from Pacific CommWare  180 Beacon Hill Lane  Ashland  Oregon 97520 9701  U S A  Their telephone number is 503 482 2744     A 2 Windows 95  When running Windows 95 Turbo must be run from the MS DOS mode  Here are the steps     1 Right click      on the desktop and select New gt Shortcut  For the command line  specify the full path name  of the program or runtime  or use the Browse button to select the program     Press the Next button and enter an appropriate name for the shortcut  This is the name that will appear  under the icon on the desktop  Press Next again and select an icon  Press Finish     2 Right click      on the newly created icon and select Properties  Select the Program Tab  Make sure that  both the Cmd line and Working entries are correct  Press the Advanced button  Check the box that says  MS DOS mode  Press OK to close this window and then press OK to close the Properties window     3 Double click      on the new icon to run the program  You should first close all running programs before  executing the MS DOS mode program     Page 214    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Index    24 12 190    A   AIB 167   abor
231. rol for a warning message to be displayed  For example  if Time is set to 5 and Events  to 10  an error message is displayed if ten JOC errors occur within five seconds  The total range for Time is 0  to 10 seconds in 1 second steps  Events can be set to any number between 0 and 250 in steps of 1     Short Warning  Short   Short Error Report  Turns on off this feature     ODEP   Sets the level above which a short will be assumed to exist  For example  setting ODEP to 75   causes an output message to be displayed whenever the ODEP level rises above 75  The range of this control  is from 0  to 100  in 1  steps     5 4 5 Input Compressor  This feature is only available for  Q2 PI P s  The Input Compressor reduces the gain of the amplifier to compress  the input signal  reducing its dynamic range     Input Compressor  Turns on off this feature     Threshold  Sets the point at which the compressor begins to affect amplifier gain  The level is measured at the  input to the P  P and corresponds to the level shown on an input meter  The compressor is    feedforward      meaning that the level detection point is located before the gain control stage  Threshold can be set from  16 dB  to    40 dB in 1 dB steps     Attack Time  Sets the rate at which the compressor responds to changes in the signal  The attack time is  defined as the time it takes the compressor to attenuate the input signal by 10 dB  The range is from 1 millisecond  to 2 seconds     Release Time  Sets the release time 
232. rom turning it up to high     Min  dB   Sets the minimum level for the Pot  In this way  you can limit the operating range of the control to  prevent an operator from turning it down too low     Page 73    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Background  Sets the background color of the Pot  The handle and border are not affected by the back   ground color     Text  Sets the foreground color of the Pot   s legend and inside lines  The legend is only visible if the Show Legend  attribute is turned on  However  the travel line along which the Pot   s control handle moves will be affected  The  handle and border are not affected by the text  foreground  color     Show Legend  Causes the legend to be displayed  The Pot legend labels the scale of the Pot  See Figure  4 4 for some example of Pots with and without legends     Horizontal  Causes the Pot to be use a horizontal orientation instead of its normal vertical orientation  See  Figure 4 4 for some samples of Pots with vertical and horizontal orientation     Border  Causes the Pot to use a three dimensional border that gives the Pot a raised appearance  This border  is not affected by the color attributes  It is often desirable to turn off the border when the Pot is placed inside a  container  This causes it to blend into the container  See Figure 4 4 for some samples of Pots with and without a  border     Cursor to Handle  Causes the cursor to snap to the handle whenever the mouse is clicked over the Pot   
233. rown Bus loops     DSPI The Data Signal Presence Indicator is an LED  light emitting diode  on each IQ component that flashes  whenever it receives a data signal addressed to it  It can be forced to stay on as a troubleshooting aid to find  breaks in communication  Note  On some IQ components the DSPI is labelled    DATA        Duck The Duck Priority function is used to prioritize inputs  Inputs with a lower priority will be automatically  attenuated  ducked  when a higher priority input is used  Together  the Gate and Duck Priority functions provide  sophisticated automatic mixing capability     Duck Priority Level Sets the duck priority level for an input  The highest priority is 1  The lowest is 6  See  Duck also     Emergency Mute A feature that quickly silences all IQ components  It is very helpful for panic situations when  the audio must be turned off quickly  It must be enabled in the Control Panel screen     Engage Activating the system settings by downloading them to the  Q System  The system settings are  automatically engaged when a dataframe file is opened     Equalizer A device containing a series of filters that enable an audio signal to be adjusted to a desired  magnitude response shape  Often a    flat    or equal level response is desired     Exit Close the IQ program  IMPORTANT  Exiting the IQ program does not automatically save the current  system settings to a dataframe file  They must be saved beforehand by pressing f9      Expansion Ratio An AMB functio
234. rve Object from the Toolbox  The Curve Attributes window  Figure 4 55  will then  open so you can configure it  Its attributes are described below        Fig  4 55 The Curve Attributes Window    Background  Sets the background color of the Curve object if it is ever dragged onto the graphics plate  This  attribute has no affect when the Curve object is displayed on a Plotter object     Text  Sets the foreground color of the text for the Curve object when it is placed on the graphics plate  This  attribute has no affect when the Curve object is placed on a Plotter object because the text will then use the same  color as the Curve color     Curve Color  Sets the color of the curve and curve label when they are displayed on a Plotter object     If a Plotter object does not already exist  one will be automatically created when the Curve object is created   However  if a Plotter object does already exist  the new Curve object will be linked to it   A single Plotter object can  contain more than one curve   Figures 4 56 and 4 57 show a Plotter with one curve and two curves     Page 111    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software       Fig  4 56 One Curve Object on a Plotter Object       Fig  4 57 Two Curve Objects on a Plotter Object    A Curve object can always be unlinked  This is done by dragging the label of the curve off of the Plotter object   Figure 4 58 shows what an unlinked Curve object looks like on a graphics plate     rrr 4    Fig  4 58 An Unlinked Curve Obje
235. s  Select the Power control for the desired channel and toggle it on and off with the     Space Bar        Atten  Sets the input attenuation level of each channel  The attenuation can be increased and decreased in 1  dB steps using ys    p  and gst   g   Any number from 0 to 50 can also be entered directly     Pol  Inverts the polarity of the amplifier output channel  This can be useful if the amplifier   s output was reversed  as a result of miswiring or other circuit anomaly  Invert the polarity with the Pol control to change the signal polarity  to the loudspeakers     Mute  Turns an input on and off  When an input is muted  its signal is attenuated 80 dB     Page 122    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    5 3 2 Global Amplifier Controls  There are several manual controls that are global in nature and are controlled from a special window  To display  this window from the Control Block screen press f   A sample is shown in Figure 5 9     As their name suggests  the    all    amplifier controls simultaneously affect all amplifiers represented by the present       Fig  5 9 The Amplifier    All     Global  Controls    Control Block screen  This means that all on line amplifiers with legacy IQ PI P s are controlled by the All PIP IQ   AP Control window  shown in Figure 5 9  which is accessed from the legacy IQ P  P Control Block screen  And  all amplifiers with  Q2 P  P s are controlled by the All IQ2 PIP Control window  not shown  which is accessed from  the 
236. s  listed below            All SMX 6s must be connected to the system via the Crown Bus   2  AllASAcontrols must be turned on     3  With the CLN wiring disconnected and the System control of the External Functions turned off  set the  Master  Ext Algos  Duck and Gate Count controls     4  Connect the CLN serial cables as described in the  Q Mixer Hardware Installation or Reference Manual   5  Select the master SMX 6 in the External Functions window and turn the System control on  The CLN and  external functions will begin to run     After the CLN has been properly initialized  the System control can be turned on off at any time to enable or disable  CLN communication     WARNING  You will be locked out of any further serial port communication with an  SMX 6 when you initialize the CLN  This means you cannot use an SMX 6 as an IQ interface at the    Page 154    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    same time you plan to use itin a CLN  If you are    locked out    of an SMX 6 and are unable to connect it to a Crown  Bus  you must contact the Crown Support Group for further assistance  All SMX 6s must be connected  to the system via a Crown Bus loop when the CLN is initialized     The External Function controls are described below in the order in which they should be set  It is very important  to tum the System control on last as described in the previous CLN startup procedure     One of the first things to do is to decide which SMX 6 will serve as the CLN maste
237. s IQ components  are listed in the table in Figure 3 23  All ID codes begin with   followed by two characters     Description   The third line lists the description that will appear in the list of IQ components in the GDM  Container Attributes window  Figure 3 24   It should be no more than 30 characters in length or  depending on the  characters used  it may be too long for the list     Page 63    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software       Code IQ Component    08 Matrixer  MRX 12 and MRX 24    0A SMX 6 Mixer    0B AMB 5 Mixer    0E MPX 6 Mixer    0F IQ PI P  IQ PI P AP    11 DRN 6 Drone    13 IQ PI P MEM  SMT  DP DSP    14 IQ PSI  Pocket Serial Interface    17 SLM 8 Load Monitor             Fig  3 23 ID Codes for OIFs    GDMFileName   The fourth line lists the file name of the GDM file  The GDM file will be created later but you  should decide what to name it when you prepare the OIF  The GDM extension does not need to be included in  the file name  AMP could have been used in place of AMP GDM   We chose to use an easily recognizable name  like AMP since this GDM will be used to control an amplifier via an IQ PIP     Ifan OIF already exists for the IQ component  you can simply open it with a text editor  find the  Component  section  and change the GDMFileName  Substitute the file name of the new GDM that you will create  Then save the  changes  Caution  You may want to save a backup copy of the OIF before you edit it  Then you can use it again  if ever need to
238. s above  and below remain available for assignment to other inputs  If several SMX 6 mixers will be linked in a Crown Local  Net  they will be able to share Duck Priority information with other SMX 6 mixers  If this is the case  you will also  need to consider the input priorities of the other SMX 6 mixers     Tip  When a signal ducks  the gain drops to the Low Set level for that input  The default value is off   100 dB    This may sound too abrupt because it is such a large transition  To avoid this problem  pick a higher value for a  more smooth transition  The Low Set control can be set so high that the ducked signal is still audible over  background noise  This may be desirable when mixing a debate or conference     Note  The Delay Time control of the Gate function also affects the Duck Priority function  When a high priority  input falls below its gate Threshold  all ducked inputs must remain at their Low Set levels until after the Delay  Time     Duck priorities can be shared by more than one SMX 6 if they are connected to a Crown Local Net  See Section  6 4 7 for more information     The following list shows the possible settings for each Duck Priority function control     Duck Priority  On Off  Level  1  2  3  4  5  6    Page 145    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software       Fig  6 11 The Second SMX 6 Sub block Screen    6 4 3 Input Compressor Limiter Function    Figure 6 11  The Max Gain settings you select in the Gate function should be acceptable fo
239. s as an indicator light  It can be used to visually signal when something  is turned on or off  To place an LED on a graphics plate  choose LED from the Toolbox  The LED Attributes  window  Figure 4 14  will then open so you can configure it  Its attributes are described next     LEP Attributes        Fig  4 14 The LED Attributes Window    Component List  Selects the IQ component to which the LED will be linked  All IQ components that appear  in the control blocks and all  Q2 components whose UCODE  OIF file  is visible to Turbo will appear in this list     Function List  Selects the specific function that the LED will monitor  The function list will change to match the  IQ component selected in the component list     Channel  Selects the channel which the LED will monitor  This attribute will not be available for some IQ  components and some functions     Input  Selects the input which the LED will monitor  This attribute will not be available for some IQ components  and some functions     Group  Selects the matrix group which the LED will monitor  This attribute is only available for IQ matrixers   Relay  Selects the matrix relay which the LED will monitor  This attribute is only available for IQ matrixers     On  Sets the color when the function monitored by the LED is turned on     Page 83    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Off  Sets the color when the function monitored by the LED is turned off     Invert  Swaps the on off commands so that the LED
240. s set to the  Selected mode     Lock  When turned on  the Lock control locks the Channel 1 and 2 gain controls together for each input  But  before doing so  all gain controls for the mixer will be set to  100  off  as shown in Figure 6 7     When locked  changing the level of Input 1  Channel 1 will cause an identical setting in Input 1  Channel 2     Page 138    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Pi     4  P  P  4  4  E  Far  4  4  E  P  4  4  G  P        Fig  6 7 Turning the SMX 6 Lock Feature On Sets All Gain Controls to  100 dB    Input  Sets the input gain for each channel  When a gain control is turned down as far as it will go   100 dB  the  input control will say    Off  The range of the gain controls is  25 to  100 dB  The gain can be increased and  decreased in   dB steps with swet   fej and gst   p2  or a whole number can be entered directly  precede    negative numbers with a minus sign                The input gain control has its own    emergency mute    feature  Pressing the    Space Bar    when a gain control is  selected immediately mutes the gain  sets itto  100 dB   This feature is a toggle  If the control is still selected  press     Space Bar    again to toggle back to the previous setting  The previous level setting is lost if the cursor is moved  to another control     All  The level of each output channel can be increased or decreased in 3 dB increments with the All controls  To  do so  select one of the controls labelled    03    u
241. s83 Biss sees a warn ceateaee tania aed a E    8 2 1 Monitoring from a Control Block  8 2 2 Monitoring from a Graphics Plate               8 3 Manually Controlling a Drone         c cscsssssssssessesessessssesessssessessssecssssssesessnsessnsssasscsassnsasensasenees  8 3 1 Manual Control from a Control Block          seececceccessessseseeseesessessesseseseeesensensenteneeteaeeasss  8 3 3 Manual Control from a Graphics Plate  8 4  Control Block Shortcuts 32  0   csc03 seachenet  eneanneenoeieannwunnecedienweneanes  8 5  annda DOE te nce eee tte tt ON r ns tat te Ae ee a a  8 5 1 AUX Input Setup  8 5 2     Simplex Mode Assignment           cccsesssesseesssesssessssesssesssssssssesessessssesssesnsasersaeeneees  8 5 3 Binary Mode Assignments            ccceccscecsssesesececsesesesscacsesessescssecacsnseeseassnsesanetenseeates  8 5 4 Analog Input Assignments  8 5 5 AUX Output Assignments         8 5 6 Paralyze Setup         scseee  8 6 Linking Multiple Drones    22 0  scce ceseen scien sera eereeenieesscnueei eterna acctneeiaeieidceeiariinreceets  9 Monitoring  amp  Controlling Matrixers             c cccccssseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeees  9 1 Initializing a Matrixer Control Block         c ccssssssssessesssesessssessesnssessesessesesseseseseeseasensassnsasensasesees  9 2 Using a Control Block to Monitor  amp  Control a Matrixer                9 3 Using a Graphics Plate to Monitor  amp  Control a Matrixer    10 Monitoring  amp  Controlling a PSI         cceeecceeeseeeee
242. scribed next     Page 173    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    8 5 1 AUX Input Setup  The AUX inputs can be used in one of two modes  simplex or binary  This is set in the first drone Sub block screen   titled Drone Aux Input Setup  shown in Figure 8 4         Fig  8 4 The Drone Aux Input Setup Sub block Screen    In simplex mode each input is monitored separately to see if it is on or off  The commands assigned to each input  are sent as dictated by its on off status  In binary mode the inputs are monitored as a group and their on off states  are added to create a binary code  The commands assigned to a binary code are sent only when a strobe signal  is received and the on off state of all inputs in the binary group combine to equal the code  This allows many more  controls to be connected to the inputs because of the many possible combinations of on off states  Binary mode is  useful when you need to connect more controls to a drone than it has inputs or when you need to receive a digital  signal     To switch a logic input between simplex and binary  select the input with g g and press the    Space Bar     Notice  that binary inputs are grouped together into    channels     The groups are labelled Channel A through D and a  minimum of four consecutive inputs  3 binary and 1 strobe  are required to form a binary channel  The last input  of every binary channel must be used as a strobe to signal when binary codes should be read by the drone   Turning on
243. section will describe how to use  Turbo to configure a drone     Let s begin with the drone Control Block screen  A sample is shown in Figure 8 1  Notice that a single drone control  block occupies the entire drone Control Block screen        Fig  8 1 A Drone Control Block Screen    8 1 Initializing a Drone Control Block   The first step in initializing a drone control block is to set the IQ address and Crown Bus loop number  This is  normally done automatically during a roll call  However  you can set them manually if you need to configure a  system off line     IQ Address  amp  Crown Bus Loop  The IQ address number you enter must match the physical IQ address  switch setting on the IQ drone  The Crown Bus loop number must match the physical loop to which the drone is  wired     On Line  The phrase    On Line    will appear in the upper right corner of the information area when a drone is  actively connected to and in communication with the IQ System     Model  Location  amp  Purpose  These three text lines are available for you to include relevant notes about  the unit  Up to 15 characters can be entered on each line     Interface  When a drone is used as an IQ interface between a host computer and one or two Crown Bus    Page 169    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    loops  the word    Interface    will appear in the box in the lower right portion of the control block     8 2 Monitoring a Drone  The state of each drone input and output can be monitored
244. sible settings for each Mute function control     Allow Mute  On Off  Mute  On Off    Page 158    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    SHH SLAM  g    SAHI EMT       Fig  6 18 The Fifth AMB 5 Sub block Screen    6 4 10 AMB Function  AMB 5 Mixers Only     Figure 6 18  The AMB function is unique to the AMB 5 mixer  The AMB function monitors the ambient sense input   Input 6  and automatically adjusts the mix output level of Channel 1 up or down accordingly  This enables the  AMB 5 to automatically mix and control the overall loudness in an environment with background noise levels that  vary  For example  it can insure that a factory paging system will never be too quiet or too loud when noisy  machinery turns on and off     The AMB function operates after all other functions have processed the audio signals  You can think of the AMB  function as a    black box    which sits after all other automatic functions     There are external factors that can greatly affect how well this functions works  The two most important ones are  the location of the ambient sense microphone and the location of the loudspeakers  The ambient sense micro   phone must be located in a position where it can pick up the ambient noise level without also picking up unwanted  sounds  The ambient sense microphone must also be located far enough away from the loudspeakers so that  they do not inadvertently trigger the AMB function  It may take some experimentation to find both the optimum  loca
245. sie  3 931   Preparing an OlF a  iion a ae ee ied   3 9 2 gt     Exit andRestant DO cisely ai  ee haven ates teria ite idles  3 9 3 Creating a GDM Container dii  3 9 4 Adding Objects to the GDM Container           ccccssesssssssssssessssssssssessssrsessssssssnsasersaeenees 66  3 9 5     Saving the GDM oi  ses cn dieesicivladshecinieneneleniniei E E A E relies 68  3 10     Saving a Graphics  Plate es  sciceciedivcteecine as auicigeveisledevelie hac n n AA 69          4 10 Spin Control    ccescesssssssssssssesssssssesssssssssesscsessnssssesacsvsasscsassveeussesucecsusaceussessseeseneesessesensessnsesses  4 11 System Button wn  4 12  GDM Containet sccceianecaicanena eanadasiadiwadana sianawannwedanadannwanes 97  ANS  Mini Plateia tes cecttecntita sete edt ait alee tii lal iit a 100        Drone Objects  4 16  Plottet innn enean n ea Senda aie 108       Page 4    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    5 Monitoring  amp  Controlling Amplifiers                             5 1 Initializing an Amplifier Control Block          cccscssssssssssessssssnssessssssessussssessssussssessssessssasassssasensass  5 2 Monitoring an Amplifieh  s c   2s c2 s5  asics cevien sect ieacasts a eatdante   5 2 1 Monitoring from a Control Block       c  csecssssssssssssssessssessssssssssssssasscseussesnssssnsseenssesrsees  5 2 2 Monitoring from a Display Screen  5 2 3 Monitoring from a Graphics Plate           cccscssessssessssessssessssessssessssesssesnsssersasersasensaeevees  5 3 Manual Co
246. signments   The difference between simplex and binary modes was introduced at the beginning of Section 8 5 1  Let s briefly  review  Binary inputs are grouped and their on off states added to create a binary code so that many possible  signals can be received with just a few inputs  It is possible to have up to four different binary groups  called  channels  and each input can be in only one group at a time  The groups are labelled Channel A through D and  a minimum of four consecutive inputs  3 binary and 1 strobe  are required to form a binary channel  The last input  of every binary channel must be used as a strobe  Turning on the strobe input tells the drone it is time to read the  inputs in the binary channel  The strobe must then cycle through another off on cycle before the channel will be  read again  The decimal value of each input in a binary channel is listed below     Input Decimal Value       Please note  Although it is physically  possible to have up to 32 768 different binary  codes  32 678 different binary input  combinations   the maximum number of binary  codes that can actually be used in a system is  determined by the memory management  system in the drone  At the time of this writing   systems have been installed which use over  800 binary codes  Please contact our Technical  Support Group  800 342 6939 or 219 294 8200   if you require over 800 binary codes in your  system                 Note  Only 15 inputs are listed above because the strobe input is n
247. some very advanced setups  To make the Output Compressor   Limiter work like a conventional output compressor  make certain that all of the Output Limit controls are turned on   Selectively turning off an Output Limit control enables its input to push all remaining inputs down whenever it  exceeds the Threshold  This is a specialized function and is offered only for those unique circumstances which  require it     Tip  You dont have to compress all inputs  You could restrict compression to an offending input  leaving  unchanged the signals that are unlikely to exceed the Limit Threshold  The Output Compressor Limiter function  allows the mixer to maintain a more natural sense of dynamics  with fewer audible side effects     The following list shows the possible settings for each Output Compressor Limiter function control  Note  All dB  settings are dBu    Compressor Limiter  On Off   Limit Threshold  Off   99  dB to  25 dB in   dB steps   Compression Ratio  1 1  2 1  4 1  8 1  16 1  32 1  00 1   Release Time  0 2  0 4  0 6  0 8  1  1 5  2  3  4  6  8  10  12  15  20  30 seconds   Output Limit  On Off    Page 152    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    6 4 6 Gate Count Function    Figure 6 13  The Gate Count function  working in conjunction with the Gate function  keeps track of how many  gates are open at a time  and provides feedback control when a large number of mics are open  A similar feature  of other manufacturers    products is called    NOM     Numbe
248. sseestsseesteenesnssseecesseeensneesseseeneeissnseueeeseneeseeaes   Turning On the SMX Interrupts Function Will Disable the Ch 2 Output Comp Limiter              ccceeeceseeseeeees 156  Turning On the Mute Function Will Disable the Ch 2 Gate Count Function aa  The Mute Feature of an SMX 6 oo  eeeecessssesesssesesesseesessteseesessessessesseeseeaseseesseseseseassseeessateateateaesssussecenesans                                           crown    6 18 The Fifth AMB 5 Sub block Screen      7 1 A Typical Equalizer Control Block Screen          ssessssssssess    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software       7 2 The Input Output Level Bar Graphs on an Equalizer GDM            164  7 3 A Typical Equalizer Control Block          ccesesesesseeeseeeeees   165  7 4 A Sample Equalizer GDM                     166  8 1 A Drone Control Block Screen              0   169    8 2 Sample Objects Used to Monitor a Drone  8 3 The Drone Object Attributes Window                       8 4 The Drone Aux Input Setup Sub block Screen    s s s      174    8 5 The Drone Simplex Input Commands Sub block Screen       8 6 Adding a Command Assignment to a Simplex AUX Input      8 7 Selecting an Existing Drone Command Assignment          8 8 Adding a Command Assignment to a Binary AUX Input             8 9 Adding a Command Assignment to an Analog Input             182  8 10 Adding a Command Assignment to an AUX Output              4     184    8 11 Adding a Paralyze Command Assignment to an AUX Input     8
249. ssescsesssescsesssescsesseescsesseeassesseessseeseesssesseensseeucansneansananeaneananeenees 87  4 20 Moving a Text Object   4 21     AText Object on an On Off Button Object 0 0    ececcssesseesssesseecssesseecesesseecesessescesesseesesecnesceucaueecausaneessneaneecsnees 87  4 22 The Container Attribute Window           sceeseessesseesesseeseessesessseseesseeeceneesnsseeenesiesesseeeseieessseeseensenssieeeseiteeeaeeenetes  4 23 A Sample Empty Container Object   4 24 A Sample Container Used to Create an MRX 24 Control Panel         ccccecscsecescsesseessessesesssestesssestesssneseeeees 89  4 25 Normally New Containers Are Layered on Top of Older Containers            cccscsessssesseseseseestestestsnesneansteanees 90  4 26 Moving a Container to the Front of Another Container               4 27 The Clock Attributes Window   0       scecesecsessteseesseecesseesesseeseeceseessesesseeessueesnsseeenseiseneeseesesseeensneesneeeeeneeneeeenaes  4 28   lt A Sample Clock or ere waves onsen carve escent E alana ENN  4 29 The Spin Control Attributes Window     4 30     Sample Spin ControlScan iieii a a  4 31 The System Button Attributes Window          c cccesesscsssesesesssesesesseesesessessssessecssseesesssseeseensseeneeneaesneanesesneaneeesnees  4 32 Dataframe Files Must Be Stored in the Turbo Directory      433      The Select Mini Plate WindOW ti 2 60 eccevetti eee anal a dees  ASA     A SVSIEM BUIOMN Es 25s E E cecccten  oan ecko E ET eset AEE  435 The GDM Container Attributes Window
250. sssssessesassessesesscsessessssessessesessecsesecsecessecseeeesees 43  A Portion  of a Sample Printout eorr a ETRE ERER E 44  Checking Available Memory from a Control Block Sereen        c cccccssessescssessescssessescssesnesceuesnesceuesneessnseneeseneenes 44  Checking Available Memory from a Graphics Plate          cccccssssessesessessesessessssessesnesesnesnssesnesnesesesessseaneessees 44  The Graphic Display Module  GDM  for an IQ PI P MEM uu  eeecescsssecseesteseessesesesseeseesessessuesssaseseseteenseneaneees 46  The Objects Used for the Graphics Plate Design Example           cccccccsscsssessescssesescssesnescsnesnsscseseecsneseeseneenes 46  The Combined Objects for the Graphics Plate Design Example            ccccccssessessssesesnstessensnesnssnsneseansnesneaeees 47  Begin a New Graphics Plate at the Graphics Plate Control Block Sereen          scsssscsssessescstesescstsstescstssnesssneens 49  The  Graphics  Setup Windowsa marye se Ie a ENE Ee ESA AEN 50  A Graphics Plate with a Stadium Picture in the Background            ccscsessesessecsesessesesessesnssessesnessseeessseeneessnees 51  The Graphics Plate Attributes WINdOW          csccccssesssessesscsesseescsesseescseesssssseesecnssesssanssecnsansneensansneansananeeneananeens 51  An Empty Graphics Plate with a Visible Grid          c ccsccsssssecsssessessssessessssessssnssessecnssesussueecsuesneessnsaeasaneeneanes 52          The Graphics  Plate  TOOIDOX cini orite se eA I eewieec cece ce R E R 53  The Select Compone
251. st  key     The control blocks of some  but not all  IQ components are also available from a graphics plate  Figure 2 16 shows  a graphics plate version of the same SMX 6 control block that is highlighted in Figure 2 15  It is accessed by  double clicking      on the GDM  graphics display module  of an IQ component     Although both the text screen and graphics plate versions of a control block appear to have many of the same  controls  the graphics plate version is slightly more limited than the text version  For instance  the graphics plate  version only allows you to display one control block at a time  In addition  the ASA  Auto System Activate  control  can only be tumed on and off   you cannot use it to access the sub blocks where the automation features are    Kultivleser WEL Loop 1    T  1 1 1 a a a a 6 ALL  Endl  ERW   3   39  19  3  F  19  35    Location  AURLTOALUH b  a   39  109  aF  19  39 W  Purgose  BATH AS J       Fig  2 16 An SMX 6 Control Block from a Graphics Plate    configured  To access the automation features from a graphics plate you would need to create your own custom  sub block with the various control objects in the graphics plate Toolbox   Sub blocks are discussed in Section 2 6  and graphics plates are discussed in Sections 2 8  3 and 4      Page 31    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    2 5 1 The Parts of a Control Block  Now lets focus on just one control block and see how itis put together  Notice in Figure 2 15 that each c
252. stem after  it has been configured  With the LED indicators on the front panel it is easy to see the pass fail status of any  channel     AUX Out P F Report  Turn on this control if you want to use the AUX port output to signal whenever one  or more channels fails an impedance or frequency test  The SLM 8 uses reverse logic for this feature  It turns  on the AUX output when all channels have passed all tests and it turns off the AUX output when one or more  channels fails a test  In this way the AUX output can also signal a power loss     Channel Configuration  The following parameters configure the individual settings of each channel     Label  Sets a text string that identifies the channel  Alabel can be up to 20 characters in length and is stored  in the memory of the SLM 8 where it is backed up in case of power failure     Acquire Mode  Determines which test s  will be performed on the channel  The possible settings are   Off Pass  Do not test but report a    passed    status   Off Report  Do not test but continue to report the previous test results   Impedance  Test the impedance response only   Frequency  Test the frequency magnitude response only   Imp Freq  Test both the impedance and frequency magnitude response     Reference  Measure the reference impedance response and reference frequency magnitude re   sponse     Start  Hz   Sets both the beginning frequency of a test and the beginning frequency of the returning data   Stop  Hz   Sets both the ending frequency of 
253. stom GDM  Right clicking      on the GDM Container later  will reopen the GDM Container Attributes window so you can press the Edit button     Asample GDM Container is shown in Figure 4 37 below  It looks like a typical Container object     Fig  4 37 A GDM Container    However  objects placed inside the GDM Container will be automatically linked to the same IQ component to which  the GDM Container is linked     Page 99    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    4 13 Mini Plate   AMini Plate Container is a specialized container object that is used to create a popup panel called a mini plate  You  can use mini plates for a wide variety of purposes  They can be used to create an on line help system  They can  be used to provide hidden controls  For example  a System Button labelled    Advanced    could open a mini plate  to reveal controls that you don   t want displayed on the graphics plate until needed  Mini plates are opened and  closed with System Button objects and they are saved along with the graphics plates to dataframe files  Once a  mini plate has been created  it is available to all graphics plates in the dataframe file  To place a Mini Plate  Container on a graphics plate  choose Mini Plate from the Toolbox  The Mini Plate Attributes window  Figure  4 38  will then open so you can configure it  Its attributes are described below     Background  Sets the background color of the Mini Plate Container object     Hiei Flate Attributes  packarount H  Pox F
254. sub block  Then  press the    Space Bar    to toggle through the possible views and select one  They include  Impedance curve   Frequency curve  Impedance Reference curve  Frequency Reference curve  Impedance and Impedance  Reference curve  Frequency and Frequency Reference curve  Finally  press pete  to switch to the Curve  screen and view the selected curve for the selected channel  A sample is shown in Figure 11 3     Page 196    1Q MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown       Fig  11 3 A Sample Impedance Curve    Press gst  to exit the curve screen and return to the Sub block screen  Note  Only one channel can be viewed  at a time     11 2 3 Monitoring from a Graphics Plate  The most flexible way to monitor an SLM 8 is from a graphics plate where you can use a Plotter and one or more  Curve objects to create a custom graph  A sample is shown below in Figure 11 4        Fig  11 4 A Sample Graphics Plate Plotter Object with Two Curves    More than one curve can be used with a single Plotter object as is shown in Figure 11 4 and more than one  channel can be viewed in a single Plotter object  And a graphics plate can contain more than one Plotter object    See Section 4 16 and 4 17 for instructions on using Plotter and Curve objects on a graphics plate         Page 197    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    11 2 4 Using a Monitor Speaker   Finally  an SLM 8 channel can be monitored from a monitor speaker  The Monitor setting in the middle of the 
255. t 201   acquire mode 200   action 77   add 175   address 27  97  119  134  169  189  193  195  208  algo 203   all 139   allabort 201   all on off 190   allstart 201   allow mute 157   AMB function 159 161   AMB 5 133 161  178  183  185  203  ambience 160  203   ambient offset 161  203   amount 126   amplifiers 115 131  176  177  183  185  amplitude 198   analog data 170   analog input 187   analog input container  drone  105    ASA  auto system activate  26  34  121  139  141 142   171 203    attack time 126  128  146  160  203  atten  attenuation  122  203  attributes 59 60  203   autoASAon roll call 26   auto break detect 26   auto level 148 150  203   auto levelergate 149   auto search all loops 26   auto Xaxis 109   auto Y axis 109   automated controls 125 128  141 161         crown    AUX 121  138  190  194  200  201  203  AUX in trigger 200   AUX input 187   AUX input container  drone  104   AUX out p freport 200   AUX output container  drone  106   AUX system digital data 170   available functions 176  182  184    B   background 41  50  64  74  80  82  88  91  92  97  100   103  108  111  113  207   bar meter 79 80  203   base address 25   baud rate 24  25  203   binary 180 181   binary input container  drone  105   blink 84   border 65  74  80  84  88  92  98  100  108  113   bottom Y axis 109   break detection 203   bus 139 204    Cc   ch channel  165   change plate 94   channel 73  76  79  81 92   channel configuration 200   click 204   CLN  Crown local net  154 15
256. t Drone Container   Aux Output Container  Selects a Drone Container which is linked to a single AUX output of the drone  LED    objects placed in the container will be automatically linked to the specified AUX output of the drone  To configure  the Aux Output Drone Container press the Setup button  The Attributes window shown in Figure 4 47 will open     fie Cutpit Comte  msr Attributes       Fig  4 47 The Aux Output Drone Container Attributes Window    Output  Selects a drone AUX output   Background  Sets the background color of the Aux Output Drone Container   Paralyze Button  Selects a Drone Paralyze Button which is linked to a single input of the drone when it is placed    in an Aux Input Drone Container  To configure the Drone Paralyze Button press the Setup button  The  Attributes window shown in Figure 4 48 will open     Oe Serttiege  D Semd OE Seth deg        Fig  4 48 The Paralyze Drone Button Attributes Window    Page 106    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Paralyze Input  Selects a drone input to which the Paralyze Button will be linked   AUX  Analog  Selects whether the input is an AUX input or an analog input     When Paralyzed  Selects the type of commands that will be sent  if any  when the Paralyze Button is turned on   The available commands will vary depending on whether an AUX or analog input is selected     When Unparalyzed  Selects the type of commands that will be sent  if any  when the Paralyze Button in turned  off  The available c
257. t has one  If Display is set  to    Memory     the last version of the selected graphics plate which was stored in memory will be displayed     Display Now Acontrol that causes Turbo to switch from the graphics plate Control Block screen to the selected  graphics plate     Display Screen A text mode screen that graphically displays input and output levels and  in the case of  amplifiers  provides  OC and ODEP indicators  Many display screens can be accessed by pressing   2     Distributed Intelligence Many IQ components  like sensing IQ mixers and drones  have the ability to run  themselves because of their on board function    intelligence     This enables the supervision of an  Q System to be  distributed to local components rather than being centrally controlled from only one point  This makes  Q Systems  less expensive and more fail safe     Page 205    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Double Click Press and release a mouse button twice     in rapid succession   usually the left mouse  button     Download To transfer system settings from the host computer to the IQ components in a system   Drag Press and hold a mouse button           usually the left mouse button   while moving the mouse     DRN 16  Drone  IQ DRN 16  An IQ drone card that plugs into a Crown card cage enabling an unmanned  audio system to function automatically or  if human control is desired  be controlled from a remote location  It can  also serve as an IQ interface for up to two C
258. t is adjusted     Note  It is possible to assign more than one command to the same drone input  In this way  a single  potentiometer can control a number of different levels of one or more IQ components  Important   Commands are executed in the order that they are added to an input  Carefully plan  the order that you want the commands to be executed before adding them to an input or else you may have       Page 182    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    to delete and reenter them later   The following    analog    commands are available for each IQ component     Amplifier IQ P   P  without SmartAmp features   Attenuation   set the input attenuation level of each channel  Amplifier IQ P   P  with SmartAmp features  includes all the above commands plus    Smooth Output Limiter Threshold   set the point when smooth limiting begins  Stand By Gate Level   set the point when the high voltage supplies turn on  Fault Error Input Drive Level   set the minimum drive level for a fault  MPX 6 Mixer   Attenuation   set the attenuation level of each input and channel  SMX 6 Mixer  includes all MPX 6 commands plus    Max Gain   set the maximum gain for an input and channel  Low Set   set the    closed gate    gain for an input and channel  Gate Threshold   set the point when an input gate    opens     Input Compression Threshold   set the point when input compression begins  Auto Level DAOL   set the Desired Average Output Level of each input and channel  Idle Gain   set t
259. t the point when the AMB function will begin to operate  Equalizer   DSP    force Data Signal Presence Indicator to stay on  Mute   mute the audio signal  In Out   switches the equalizer    in    and    out    of the signal path  Store   store equalizer settings into one of ten presets per channel  A or B   Recallrecall any stored preset  Output Gain   set the output gain  Filter   set the level of each equalizer filter  MRX 24  24S  12  12S   DSP  force Data Signal Presence Indicator to stay on  AUX   turn on off AUX port output  Relay   turn on off each relay    Momentary  Use this setting if a momentary style switch  commonly a spring loaded push button which  makes momentary contact when depressed and released  is connected to the drone input     When turned on  the Momentary parameter causes the associated command to be sent when the switch is  closed and no command to be sent when it the switch is opened  This means that any    off    command  or    on     command if the Inverted command is also turned on  will not be sent when the switch is opened     Inverted  Reverses the    on    and  off  commands  The    on    commands will be sent when the switch is    off     and the    off    commands will be sent when the switch is    on        Page 178    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Relative   Only available when a level function is selected   Causes level functions to add or subtract from  existing levels rather than replacing them  When the Relativ
260. t your appetite to the kind of power and control you can have with  a graphics plate  For a full description of the Pot object and all of the objects see the Object Reference section   Section 4  later in this manual     3 3 6 Copying and Pasting an Object   After carefully configuring an object you may want to copy it  Then after it has been copied  you can open its  Attributes window and assign it a new function or a different IQ component  This can be a real time saver when  designing many similar controls     It is easy to copy and paste an object on a graphics plate  Simply move the pointer over the object and press   42   The object is then temporarily copied to a clipboard in the memory of the computer  displacing the  previous contents of the clipboard   Next  move the pointer over an unused portion of the graphics plate or  container and press A    f    to paste the copy  The computer will beep if you try to paste the object into an area  that is too small  You can continue to paste additional copies of the object by moving the pointer to other unused  areas of the graphics plate or containers and pressing p        7 again     Page 60    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    3 4 Deleting an Object from a Graphics Plate   How do you get rid of an object that you no longer need  You remove it by positioning the pointer over it and  pressing  p  When you do this  the objectis not completely deleted  It is cut from the graphics plate and placed  in a clip
261. ta Signal Presence Indicator is an LED on the front panel of the SLM 8  labelled    DATA     that  flashes whenever the unit is polled  The DSPI control is used to force the indicator to stay on as an aid to the  troubleshooting of communication on the Crown Bus  Once the DSPI control is turned on  the Data indicator will  remain lit continuously even if the control block for another device is selected  Turning offthe DSPI control restores  the indicator to its normal function of blinking when a valid IQ command is received     Aux  Toggles the unit s AUX port output on and off     The AUX port also has the ability to sense the presence of an external signal  When a logic    high    is detected at  the AUX connector  an asterisk     will appear beside it     Trig  When the Trig control is turned on and it is saved in a dataframe file  Turbo will automatically initiate a test  for the SLM 8 when the dataframe file is loaded and engaged     Start  Immediately initiates a test in the selected SLM 8   Abort  Immediately stops a test in progress in the selected SLM 8   Setup  Switches to the SLM 8 Setup Sub block screen     Monitor  Sets the channel whose audio signal will appear at the fused monitor output on the back panel of the  SLM 8  Whenever the Monitor setting is changed  Turbo first turns off the monitor outputs on all SLM 8s in the  system  Then it turns on the selected monitor channel for the selected unit  This enables multiple SLM 8s to be  connected to the same monit
262. tem Software crown    Attenuation   set the input attenuation level of each channel  All Power   turn on off the high voltage supplies of ALL amplifiers in one zone  All Mute   mute unmute the input of ALL amplifiers in one zone  All DSP    force the DSPI lights of ALL relevant amplifiers to stay on in one zone  Amplifier IQ P  P  with SmartAmp features  includes all the above commands plus    ASA   turn on off all automation functions  ODEP Conservation   enable automatic gain reduction as ODEP level rises  Smooth Output Limiter   enable    smooth    output limiting  Smooth Output Limiter Threshold   set the point when smooth limiting begins  Stand By   enable standby mode when no signal present  Stand By Gate Level   set the point when the high voltage supplies turn on  Stand By Turn Off Delay   disable turn on delay while using standby mode  Fault Error Reporting   show an alert message if a fault occurs  Fault Error Input Drive Level   set the minimum drive level for a fault  Report Fault Via AUX   turn on AUX port if a fault occurs  IOC Error Reporting   show an alert message if an JOC error persists  Short Error Reporting   show an alert message if a shortis detected  DSPI Flash   this control is reserved for future use  Break Detect   disable break detect when not connected to an IQ System  MPX 6 Mixer   DSP  force Data Signal Presence Indicator to stay on  AUX   turn on off AUX port output  Bus   turn on off the audio Bus output of each channel  Attenuation   set the 
263. th the    Space Bar     MRX 24 and MRX 24S models each have 24 relays  MRX   12 and MRX 12S models each have 12 relays  Depending on the model  either four or two groups with six relays  each are displayed     Note  The groups of six relays correspond to the way the relays are physically grouped on MRX 24 and MRX   24S models  They are arbitrary and can be ignored for MRX 12 and MRX 12S models which have no physical  groups     All On Off  Global    All    on off controls are provided to turn each MRX 24 or MRX 24S group of six relays on  and off as a unit  thereby turning off the group   s bus  However  since MRX 12 and MRX 12S matrixers do not  have physical groups  the All On Off controls serve to simply turn on off the first six and second six relays     Page 190    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    9 3 Using a Graphics Plate to Monitor  amp  Control a Matrixer   Amatrixer can be monitored and controlled from a graphics but there are no ready made GDMs  graphic display  modules  for matrixers  This means that you must manually create objects on the graphics plate for that purpose   Figure 9 2 shows a very simple example        Fig  9 2 Monitoring  amp  Controlling a Matrixer from a Graphics Plate    In the above example a simple Container object was created and then an On Off Button object for each relay of  a MRX 24  The groups were labelled A D rather than 1 4 to avoid confusion with the relay numbers  A button was  also included for the DSPI and AUX
264. that have been licensed to  operate in an IQ System and be connected to a Crown Bus     Itis not the purpose of this User Manual to provide a detailed discussion of the features of each model  but rather  to provide some general guidelines on the use of the Turbo to control an equalizer  The specific functions and  features may vary slightly depending upon the exact model you have  Please refer to the documentation that  came with your equalizer for more details  including hardware installation instructions     Most equalizers can only be controlled from a graphics plate  There is one exception  Certain models from White  Instruments can be controlled from a control block  All references to an equalizer control block refer to the White  equalizers     7 1 Initializing an Equalizer Control Block   The first step in initializing an equalizer control block  shown below in Figure 7 1  is to set the IQ address and  Crown Bus loop number  This is normally done automatically during a roll call  However  you can set them  manually if you need to configure a system off line        Fig  7 1 A Typical Equalizer Control Block Screen    Page 163    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    IQ Address  amp  Crown Bus Loop  The IQ address number you enter must match the physical IQ address  switch setting on the equalizer  The Crown Bus loop number must match the physical loop to which the equalizer  is wired     On Line  The phrase    On Line    will appear in the upper right
265. the Control Block screen  press       Or you can select  the ASA control and press the    Space Bar        ASA  The Auto System Activate control serves two purposes  First  it serves as a master control to tum all  programming inside the drone on and off  Turning ASA off  restores manual only control  Turning ASA on restores    automatic operation  It should be turned off while training a drone     Second  the ASA control serves as an entrance to the Sub block screens where the drone is trained  To display  the first Sub block screen  highlight the ASA control and press either pete   OF gA     Page 171    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    8 3 2 Manual Control from a Graphics Plate   Earlier in Section 8 2 2 we discussed how to monitor a drone from a graphics plate and we also alluded to manual  control  This is because many of the same objects that are used to monitor a drone from a graphics plate are also  used to manually control it when its ASA control is turned off     The principals are fairly simple  First  create a drone container for each input or output that you want to control  See  Section 4 15 for additional details  Second  place an appropriate object inside each container  The objects will be  linked to the input or output represented by their container  In the example in Figure 8 2  a Pot object was placed  inside a drone analog input container  It then serves both as a level monitor and a manual control     Remember  You should not try to
266. the associated graphics plate to be displayed immediately  There are two display  modes  Selected and Memory  The display mode is controlled by the Display control on the last line of the control  block  After the graphics plate is displayed  you can return to the text Control Block screen by pressing   s   fF   or clicking the right mouse button         Control Security Lock  Locks the operation of all control objects on the graphics plate so they cannot be  used to make changes to the  Q System  In addition  the graphics plate version of the control blocks cannot be  accessed when Control Security Lock is turned on  However  this does not prevent graphic controls and objects    Page 39    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    from being edited   their size  location  color and other attributes can still be changed  This is a very handy feature  when constructing a graphics plate     Graphics Security Lock  Locks the attributes of all objects on the graphics plate so their appearance   location and function cannot be changed  This means they cannot be resized  moved or have any of their  attributes changed  However  this does not prevent control objects from being used to make changes to the  Q  System  For example  a button can still be used to turn something on and off  but the size  location or color of the  button cannot be changed  Turning on both the Trigger and Graphics Security Lock controls will prevent an  operator from haphazardly making changes 
267. the meter to the type of signal it will monitor     Page 79    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Background  Sets the background color of the Bar Meter  The border is not affected by the background color   Bar  Sets the moving bar color of the Bar Meter     Text  Sets the foreground color of the Bar Meter   s legend and inside lines  The legend is only visible if the Show  Legend attribute is turned on     Show Legend  Causes the legend to be displayed  The Bar Meter legend labels the scale of the meter  See  Figure 4 10 for some example of Bar Meters with and without legends     Peaks  Enables the peak hold feature  The peak hold feature causes the signal peaks to persist on the meter  for a fraction of a second     Border  Causes the Bar Meter to use a three dimensional border that gives it a raised appearance  This  border is not affected by the color attributes  Itis often desirable to turn off the border when the Bar Meter is placed  inside a container  This causes it to blend into the container  See Figure 4 10 for some samples of Bar Meters with  and without a border     Four Bar Meters are shown in Figure 4 10  Two of them have a legend and two do not  And two of the meters  have a border and two do not  They all have the Peaks attribute turned on                   Peak Hold Line    H        Bar Meter    Fig  4 10 Sample Bar Meter Objects       Notice in Figure 4 11 that the legend is dynamic and automatically scales itself to the size of the Pot
268. thers  you will need to include copies of all PCX files that are used     Border  Determines whether or not the border of the Mini Plate Container will be visible when a PCX picture    Page 100    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    is displayed in the container  This attribute does not affect the container when no PCX picture is used  Note  To use  the border  the Scale setting must be turned on     Scale  Determines whether or not a PCX image will be scaled to fit the size of the Mini Plate Container   Caution  If the Scale attribute is turned on and the aspect ratio  ratio of the width to height  of the container is  different from that of the PCX image  the image will be distorted to fit the container  Ifyou want to make the container  size fit the size of the image  start with the container sized bigger than the image and the Scale attribute turned off   Then link the image and after it is displayed  resize the container to fitthe image while pressing pF   The pF  key  prevents the image size from changing while the container is resized     Convert  Determines whether or not Turbo will attempt to match  convert  the color palette in the PCX image  with the one it uses     Name  Sets the name of the mini plate  The name can be up to 12 characters long and can include spaces  The  mini plate name will appear in the Select Mini Plate window when the Open Mini Plate function is selected in the  System Button Attributes window and the Select button is presse
269. tion for the ambient sense microphone and the optimum settings for this function     Tip  Unwanted sounds can often be filtered out with a band pass filter or by using an ambient sense micro   phone with a selective pass band  For example  a 500 4 000 Hz band pass filter could be added so the sense  input responds only to the noise which would interfere with speech intelligibility  Also  a high pass filter could be  added so the sense input does not pick up low frequency air conditioning noise  which can sometimes be very  loud      Tip  Shield the ambient sense microphone from excessive wind noise so that it does not prematurely activate  the AMB function     WARNING  The AMB function bases its operation on the Gate function Max Gain settings for each input  It is  extremely important that the Max Gain settings be set properly to prevent exces   sive levels which could cause feedback     Page 159    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Several of the AMB function controls interact with each other  For this reason we recommend that they be  configured in the order shown below     1  Double check the Gate function Max Gain settings of each input to be sure they are set properly to limit all  input gains to safe levels     2  Set the Ambient Offset Control to a desired level below the Max Gain settings     3  Set the Threshold of the ambient sense input to an appropriate level so that the AMB function begins to  operate at an appropriate time  This may requir
270. tiscsscsvec seaseeeadsitae cesses i    Setting  a Range Control nasais    Moving from a Control Block to a Sub block  2 6   Using SUD DIOCKS ar ands Avid walindes iad knee anes ical hea iaan  2 6 1 Navigating Sub blocks  amp  Setting Controls       c  cccscssessssesessssssssssssssssssssssssssnsasersseenees    Moving from One Sub block or Sub block Screen to Another         cscsesesessessseeeees 35  e Moving Among Sub blocks of Similar Components          c cssesessessssssesesssesssesseeneees 35    Locally Copying  amp  Pasting in a Mixer SUD DIOCK          ccccssssssssessessssessesessesneseeeees 35    Globally Copying  amp  Pasting Between IQ Components          cscsessessesssesssesessseneess 36  e Restore Default Settings to All the Sub blocks of an IQ Component         cseceseeseeeeeee 36    Moving from a Sub block Back to a Control Block         ccccssssssesssessssssssstssesnsseeeees  2 7 Activating Emergency Mute             cececsccsssssssessssesssesessescensecacsnsasensessacasensnseseceusacasensnsseasansnees  2 8   Using Graphics  Plate S inrsin oenen ana S arana Vae T aiaa Sa  2 8 1 The Graphics Plate Control Block Screen  2 8 2 Using the Graphics Plate Control Block from the Graphics Plate          c cccssssesseseree 40  2 9 Saving and Loading Dataframe Files         ccccessssssssssssesscssssssssssssssessssesssuesnsassneasssesseneaeanees 42  2 10 Printing the  Q System Settings  2 11     Checking  M MOry isinsin iiinn AN EANA A          crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced
271. to  match the IQ component selected in the component list     Channel  Selects the channel which the Digital Meter will monitor  This attribute will not be available for some IQ  components and some functions     Input  Selects the input which the Digital Meter will monitor  This attribute will not be available for some IQ  components and some functions     Max Level  Sets the maximum level for the Digital Meter  In this way  you can limit the display range of the object  to tailor the meter to the type of signal it will monitor     Min Level  Sets the minimum level for the Digital Meter  In this way  you can limit the monitor range of the meter  to tailor the meter to the type of signal it will monitor     Page 81    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Background  Sets the background color of the Digital Meter  The border is not affected by the background  color     Text  Sets the foreground color of the Digital Meter   s text     Peak Only  Determines whether or not the Digital Meter will respond only to a signal peak that is higher than  its previous setting  This causes the meter to hold the highest level it ever received     A sample Digital Meter is shown in Figure 4 13 below     15      Fig  4 13 A Sample Digital Meter    To change the attributes of an object after it has been created  click on it with the right mouse button    3      Page 82    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    4 6 LED   The LED  Light Emitting Diode  object serve
272. to 20 pixels on a standard VGA screen  640 x 480    total pixels  is shown in Figure 3 8  Except for the grid and standard Crown IQ icon  the graphics plate in  this example is empty        Fig  3 8 An Empty Graphics Plate with a Visible Grid    The grid helps you align objects so they look organized and well placed on the graphics plate  The grid  can be shown without turning on the Snap to Grid attribute  In this way it can be used as a visual alignment  aid  The grid can then be turned off after the graphics plate has been designed     Note  If both the Snap to Object and Snap to Grid attributes are turned on  Turbo will attempt to snap  objects that are moved to the grid first  and if this fails  it will snap them to another object if one is in close  proximity     Now that we ve created a new graphics plate  it is time to add the various objects that will turn it into a powerful  control center for your IQ System  The next section will explain how to place and prepare those objects     Page 52    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    3 3 Adding Objects to a Graphics Plate   This section gets down to the fundamentals of constructing a graphics plate  It answers the questions     How do    add an object to a graphics plate and how do   configure the object     The place to start is with the Toolbox  the  place from whence all objects come     3 3 1 Toolbox   The graphics plate Toolbox menu  Figure 3 9  contains a list of all of the available objects  There 
273. to a graphics plate     Display  Controls the display mode of a graphics plate  When it is set to Selected  the graphics plate will try  to display a graphic display module  GDM  for all relevant IQ components in the system whose control block Sel   Selected  control is turned on     Setting the Display control to Memory causes a graphics plate to display only those objects which were  previously stored in memory  or in a dataframe file if it has just been engaged   More than one graphics plate can  be stored into memory at the same time  To store a graphics plate into memory  first display it  then double click with  the left mouse button    3  on an unused portion of the screen  This will summon the graphics plate control block   Figure 2 24   Then click on the Store button   This is explained in the next section   When you exit a graphics  plate that has been edited  you will also be prompted to store the updated graphics plate into memory  Note   Storing a graphics plate into memory is only temporary   it is not permanent  The graphics plate will be lost if the  host computer loses power or is turned off  Use the dataframe file to permanently store a graphics plate  press     from a control block   When a dataframe file is saved  all graphics plates are saved in it     2 8 2 Using the Graphics Plate Control Block from the Graphics Plate   In addition to the graphics plate Control Block screen  it is also possible to access the graphics plate control block  from the graphi
274. trolling a PSI from a Graphics Plate    In the above example a simple Container object was created and then an On Off Button object was placed in it for  the DSPI control and the AUX port output control  Finally  a Text object was added above each button to label  them     Page 194    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    11 Configuring  amp  Monitoring    System  amp  Load Monitors    An IQ System  amp  Load Monitor such as the SLM 8 provides an IQ System with the capability to monitor the  impedance response of loudspeakers or most any amplifier load and the ability to measure the frequency  response of any line level or high level audio output in the system  Once configured  this powerful diagnostic  ability can also operate in a stand alone mode via the indicators on the front panel of the SLM 8   See the SLM   8 Reference Manual for more details      11 1 Initializing an SLM 8 Control Block   The first step in initializing an SLM 8 control block  shown below in Figure 11 1  is to set the IQ address and Crown  Bus loop number  This is normally done automatically during a roll call  However  you can set them manually if you  need to configure a system off line     IFLA aaa   l         Fig  11 1 An SLM 8 Control Block Screen    IQ Address  amp  Crown Bus Loop  The IQ address number you enter must match the physical IQ address  switch setting on the SLM 8  The Crown Bus loop number must match the physical loop to which the SLM 8 is  wired     On Line  The phr
275. trols vary widely from one type of IQ component to the next   they will not be described in detail here  The controls and monitoring features of specific IQ components are  addressed later in this manual     2 5 2 Navigating Control Blocks  amp  Setting Controls   A few special techniques are required to successfully use the Control Block screens  For example  the focus   cursor  is normally confined to a single control block at a time  How do you move it from one control block to  another  How do you add a new control block for an off line IQ component when all visible control blocks are  already being used  This section will answer these and other questions relating to the use of control blocks     e Moving from One Control Block to Another  Keyboard  Use f7  or  fs to move up or down from one control block to the next  The Offset number at the bottom    of the screen will indicate the number of the selected control block  Press    Home       to move to the first control  block  Press    End        to move to the last control block     Mouse  Click the middle mouse button     and drag the mouse up and down to move through the control blocks     Page 32    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    e Adding a New Control Block   Keyboard  Control blocks are automatically created for all on line IQ components during a roll call  In addition  new  control blocks can be manually added for off line IQ components  This is easy to do if an empty control block is  visibl
276. ttributes are described below     faq Multiplier 2  fag Multiplier 2  faq Multiplier 4  fag Multiples  amp        Fig  4 7 The Button Attributes Window    Component List  Selects the IQ component to which the Button will be linked  All IQ components that appear  in the control blocks and all  Q2 components whose UCODE  OIF file  is visible to Turbo will appear in this list     Function List  Selects the specific function that the Button will control  The function list will change to match the  IQ component selected in the component list     Channel  Selects the channel which the Button will affect  This attribute will not be available for some IQ  components and some functions     Input  Selects the input which the Button will affect  This attribute will not be available for some IQ components and  some functions     Group  Selects the matrix group which the Button will affect  This attribute is only available for IQ matrixers     Relay  Selects the matrix relay which the Button will control  This attribute is only available for IQ matrixers     Page 76    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    Action  Sets the operating mode for the Button  As its name suggests  the Push On Push Off mode causes  the Button to behave like a normal two state pushbutton that you press and release once to send the On command  and then press and release again to send the Off command  The Momentary mode causes the Button to send  the same command each time the Button is pressed  The
277. u      to switch to the equalizer Control Block screen  The equalizer control block screen is  shown below     A description of each control follows        Fig  7 3 A Typical Equalizer Control Block    Ch  Selects Channel Aor B  Each channel has its own level settings  enabling the equalizer to be used in a stereo  system  or any system where two discrete channels of equalization are desired     Lock  Locks Channel A and B together  Turning on the Lock control causes the changes made to one channel  to also be sent to the other channel     DSPI  The DSPI or Data Signal Presence Indicator is an LED on the unit which flashes whenever it unit is polled   The DSPI control is used to force the indicator to stay on as an aid to troubleshooting communication on the Crown  Bus  Once the DSPI control is turned on  the DSP  will remain on continuously even if the control block of another  device is selected  Turning off the DSPI control restores the indicator to its normal function of blinking when a valid  IQ command is received     Sel  Selects the equalizer so that a GDM for it is added to a graphics plate when the graphics plate is set to the  Selected mode     Level dB  Controls the cut or boost of a single frequency band  Only five Level controls are shown at a time and  their center frequency is displayed above them  In Figure 7 3  the Level controls centered at 31 5  40  50  60 and  80 Hz are displayed  Use gs rt  4   and gs  t  4 7 to scroll sideways through all of the Level c
278. ual number depends on the mix of filters  chosen and the total number of required filter cells   There are seven different filter types from which to choose     Each channel has a total of eight    biquad    filter cells  Note     Biquad    refers to the double quadratic equations  which mathematically describe each filter implemented in the digital signal processor  The 1st and 2nd order  filters each require one biquad filter cell  The 3rd and 4th order filters each require two biquad filter cells  This  means that a channel can have no more than four filters if they are all 3rd or 4th order filters  Remember that only  eight filter cells are available   this limits the total number of filters that a channel can have  An error message will  be reported by the IQ software if this capacity is exceeded     A description of the filter controls is presented next     Page 129    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    On Off  Turns the associated filter on and off     Type  Sets the shape and roll off rate  or order  of the filter  Seven filter shapes are available     TA   LP Low Pass Crossover Filter  The low pass filter is available in several forms    LP B1   1st order Butterworth  LP B2   2nd order Butterworth  LP Be2   2nd order Bessel  LP B3   3rd order Butterworth  LP Be3   3rd order Bessel  LP B4   4th order Butterworth  LP Be4   4th order Bessel  LP LR4   4th order Linkwitz Riley    HP High Pass Crossover Filter  The high pass filter is available in severa
279. uce an unexpected  side effect  When Max Gain is set above the DAOL of the Auto Level function  the Auto Level function could start  lowering the gain every time the gate opens  If there is a great difference between the signal level and the DAOL   the shift in gain will be very noticeable  The sound would start out loud and then fade     The Idle Gain control can compensate for this situation  Idle Gain controls the initial gain when the gate first opens   You can think of it as the    starting gain    because it overrides the Max Gain when the gate opens  Start with Idle  Gain equal to Max Gain  If the level audibly drops each time the gate opens  try a lower value for Idle Gain     IMPORTANT  The Idle Gain parameter functions only when three conditions are met  1  The Gate function is  turned on  2  The Auto Level function is turned on  3  The mixer has the Auto Leveler Gate Function control set  to    Open to idle gain      The third condition is not required for SMX 6s with firmware prior to version 1 3   See the  Auto Leveler Gate Function control below for more information     IMPORTANT  Never set Idle Gain higher than Max Gain  Because the Idle Gain overrides the  Max Gain  it is possible to force the gain above the Max Gain setting     Auto Leveler Gate  This feature is available for all AMB 5s but only for SMX 6s with version 1 3 firmware  or later   To see which firmware version your SMX 6 has  locate the white sticker above the DB 25 serial  communication connecto
280. ure 2 12  It is often  necessary to make changes to these settings the first time you run Turbo because the default settings may not be  correct for your system   s host computer  From a Control Block screen  press fFto go to the Control Panel screen     Catral Paeel         Fart     H Rat       Fig  2 12 Control Panel Screen    Use rs  or gs et  rs   to move the focus from one control to the next   msl  advances to the next control and       8  returns to the previous control   Use the    Space Bar    to change an on off control such as the PortActive  control or activate a button control like the Roll Call button  Use f    pto change the selection of an either or control  like the Display control  Many of these controls can also be set with a mouse         Serial Port  Sets the serial or com port that Turbo will use to communicate with an IQ interface  This is usually  serial port 2 because most computers have a serial mouse connected to serial port 1  Changing the serial port  number will automatically cause a new base address and interrupt to be selected     Base Address  Sets the base address in memory where Turbo must access the serial port  Normally you can  accept the default  If necessary  a different base address can be entered     Interrupt  Sets the system interrupt used by the serial port  Normally you can accept the default  If necessary   a different interrupt number can be entered     Baud Rate  Sets the first speed that Turbo will attempt to use to communicat
281. use dle ace ca a 62    3 235    ID Codes for QIFS muannas i o a A N aeae AAO ELSA 64  3 24 GDM Container Attributes Window         c  c ccccscccscssesecssestssescsesscscscssssesesessesssssusscacsesucsssssueseacsesusacacatescaseaneaeess 65  3 25   AGDM Co AET a a aa a aa r 66    3 26 The Unassembled Custom GDM ou    eeseseessessessessesseestescestecsesteeseeseeseeseseesueessseeseeseesteseseesueeseseeatsueesteneeases 66  3 27  lt    The Assembled  Custom  GDM  rasistiniai aiii 67  3 28 The Custom GDM Save Dialog Box         c cccsssssssssssssssssesesessessssessessssessecsssessessessesecueeceuseneesensaueesansaneananeensenes 68  3 29 The New GDM Replaces the Standard One That Came With Turbo       c cccssssssssstsssenssesssstssesssssseessseseeeees 68  3 30 A Prompt to Store Changes Into Memory Before Exiting a Graphics Plate         ccccscssessesssesestessestesseeeesees 69  41    The  Graphics    Plate  Toolbox  i sc  s ceer n i nea nescence deed O EE SS 71  4 2 GDM Select Component Window          c ccsssesscessesscsesssessseeseescsessecsssesssenssesncensseansansneaneansnsansansneansenaneensananeens 72  43 The Pot Attributes WindOW    22  2   sececcasseesessestetccteseeeesaeree satin aeann eiia aaa aa eA a NA 13  4 4 Sample Pot OBJEC iaaa O I N e A duane cite AES 75  4 5 The Legend Automatically Scales to Fit the Pot          ccccccssssescssessessssesssssssecssenssesnsensneenssnesssussssesnssessseeneees 75  4 6 The Pointer Changes to a Hand When the Pot Handle is Clicked or Dra
282. ut attenuators  includes power on   off buttons  mute buttons  polarity invert buttons  a DSPI button and an AUX button  A novice could easily get into  trouble   especially if they inadvertently muted or turned off an amplifier channel which is needed for the security  system when the office is closed     The best solution for this example is a custom solution   let   s build our own custom graphics plate with just those  things that the operator needs  The objects we will use are shown below in Figure 3 2     Notice that our objects are large and easy to see  Most standard GDMs are small so you can place many of them  on a graphics plate  We don   t have that constraint here because we need to monitor and control just one channel    Bar Meter    Watir Roam  Background Music    Container    Nemeal     High   Text Objects     Low    Pot  Level Control or Fader     Fig  3 2 The Objects Used for the Graphics Plate Design Example    Page 46    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    of one amplifier  For our finished graphics plate we combined the objects as shown below in Figure 3 3     The container object is used to visually tie the objects together in one neat package  It serves only an aesthetic  function  The bar meter object is assigned to monitor the output signal from Channel 1 of the amplifier  It shows how  loud the background music is in the waiting room  We used the full range  0 to  40 dB  but we turned the peak hold    Yeatting Room  Background Music
283. ut to behave as an AUX  logic  input    Background  Sets the background color of the Aux Input Drone Container    Analog Input Container  Selects a Drone Container which is linked to a single analog input of the drone  Pot    objects placed in the container will be automatically linked to the specified analog input of the drone  To configure  the Analog Input Drone Container press the Setup button  The Attributes window shown in Figure 4 45 will    Baslo Tait Comte ime Attributes       Fig  4 45 The Analog Input Drone Container Attributes Window    open   Input  Selects a drone analog input    Background  Sets the background color of the Analog Input Drone Container    Binary Input Container  Selects a Drone Container which is linked to a single drone binary input channel   On Off Buttons placed in the container will be automatically linked to the specified binary channel of the drone     To configure the Binary Input Drone Container press the Setup button  The Attributes window shown in Figure  4 46 will open     Bisang Input Comtaler Attributes  Loop i Pross fT       Fig  4 46 The Binary Input Drone Container Attributes Window  Channel  Selects a drone binary input channel  A  B  C or D      Page 105    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Switch  Selects a binary input decimal value  The Binary Input Drone Container will become active only when  this switch value is received by the binary input     Background  Sets the background color of the Binary Inpu
284. xample on the preceding  page allows up to ten different equalization curves to be stored into memory  To store the current settings into  memory  first press the Store button and then press the numbered memory button  To recall an equalization curve  from memory  first press the Recall button and then press the desired memory button     Output  Sets the gain of the equalizer  Because an equalizer is often used to attenuate unwanted peaks in  amplitude response  it is not uncommon for the net gain of the signal to be reduced  Use the Gain control to add  gain back to the signal as desired     I O  A small bar graph is available to dynamically show the input  I  and output  O  level of each channel     In Out  The IN button switches the equalizer    into    the audio path  The OUT button switches the equalizer    out     of the audio path  The OUT button acts much like a bypass switch on a conventional equalizer     AIB  Selects Channel A or B  Each channel has its own level settings  enabling the equalizer to be used in a  stereo system  or any system where two discrete channels of equalization are desired     Page 167    crown IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    Page 168    IQ MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software crown    8 Monitoring  amp  Controlling Drones    An IQ drone such as the DRN 16 can control an  Q System much like a host computer  But before it can control  other IQ components in the system  it must be configured or    trained    to do so  This 
285. y add a control block for a new IQ component that isn   t yet on line in the system    It can also be done from a graphics plate with the Add Component window  Figure 3 21   Press ga  44  from a  graphics plate to open it     Select the IQ component model from the list at the top of the window  Then enter the Crown Bus loop number and  the unit s IQ address number  Finally  click      on the OK button to create a control block for the component  The  new IQ component should now be available in the component lists of all Attribute windows in the graphics plate        Fig  3 21 The Add Component Window    Page 61    crown 1Q   MSD Turbo 1 4 Advanced IQ System Software    3 6 Copying and Pasting an Entire Graphics Plate   There may be occasions when it is desirable to copy all graphics plate objects and paste them to another graphics  plate  To do this  press germj ga   c   This copies the contents of the present graphics plate to the copy plate  clipboard  Amessage appears to inform you that the graphics plate was successfully copied  Switch to the graphics  plate where you want the copy to be pasted  Paste the graphics plate that was copied to the copy plate clipboard  to the new graphics plate by pressing e j  jt   4    All objects  including the Crown IQ logo  will be copied to the  plate being displayed     3 7 Restoring a Graphics Plate to a    New    Condition   To restore a graphics plate to a new condition  press f   4    This removes all objects except the Crown IQ log
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Brochure Catalogue    Zoom 4530  Thunder Shield - Opti-UPS  KRD as a subscriber in the PROFIBUS-DP - TWK        Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file